SIPART DR22 6DR2210. Edition 08/2010. Manual SIPART DR22 6DR2210 C79000-G7476-C154-04

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "SIPART DR22 6DR2210. Edition 08/2010. Manual SIPART DR22 6DR2210 C79000-G7476-C154-04"

Transcription

1 SIPART DR 6DR Edition 8/ Manual SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

2 Block diagram AE - AE - AE - / /9 / / /4 / S5 I,U S6 I,U S7 I,U U U U t t t S S S AEA AEA AEA S S S S5 FE S6 FE S7 FE Standard settings S to S4 Analog inputs S5 to S, S to S7 Assembly Slot 5 and 6 S, S Digital inputs S4toS48, S8 to S8 U F r o n t m o d u l e / AA AE4 /4 / / / S8 I,U,R UNI, P, T, V U t S AE4A S8 FE4 Setpoint command S49toS5 Control algorithm S54toS6 Y switching S6toS66 U U I / /4 AA AA AE5 Options /4 / / / Slot S9 I,U,R UNI, P, T, V U Slot 4 V t S4 AE5A drawn: S4 = at S4 = freely connectable S98 FE5/6 S to S7 FE7 FE8 FE9 FE FE FE Y display S67toS68 Analog outputs S69toS75, S47 to S57 Digital outputs S76toS9, S58 to S66 Limit value alarms S94toS98, S67 to S68 Restart conditions S99, S 5V 4 V I /4 /5 /6 /7 /8 /9 / / BA BA8 BE BE4 L M M /5 /6 /7 /8 / / / L N PE «5V S I be be be be4 M 4V 5V U REF User program memory for: onpa AdAP ofpa FdEF FCon FPoS APSt FPST on line off line Serial interface S to S7 AE AA y hold 5BE 4BA4V BE BA Rel. AO/BE Slot 6 AE AA y hold 5BE 4BA 4V BE BA Rel. AO/BE Slot 5 RS RS 485 PROFIBUS Slot 4 6/6 6/5 6/4 6/ 6/ 6/ Options 5/6 5/5 5/4 5/ 5/ 5/ Options 4/ 4/7 4/8 4/ 6DR-4 6DR-5 4 V UC 5/ V AC switchable Slot Terminal SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

3 Manual Classification of safetyrelated notices This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:!!! DANGER indicates an immenently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious inury. WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage. NOTICE indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.. NOTE highlights important information on the product, using the product, or part of the documentation that is of particular importance and that will be of benefit to the user. Copyright e Siemens AG 6 All rights reserved The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach NÜRNBERG DEUTSCHLAND Disclaimer of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. e Siemens AG 6 Technical data subject to change. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C544

4 Trademarks SIMATICR, SIPARTR, SIRECR, SITRANSR registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners. 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

5 Manual Contents Contents Page Technical Description Safety notes and scope of delivery Range of Application Design (Hardware) Function principle Standard controller Description of the option modules CPU self-diagnostics Data storage, User program memory....5 Functional description of the structure switches Analog input signal processing permanently connected Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ) Arithmetic Ar to Ar Function transmitter Fu and Fu Maximum value selection MA to MA Minimum value selection Mi to Mi Correction computer for ideal gases re Switch for analog variables AS to AS Comparator with adjustable hysteresis Co, Co AND NOT function (NAND) na, na OR NOT function (NOR) no, no Digital input signal processing Digital inputs BE to BE Assignment and direction of effect of the digital inputs Linking the digital inputs BE bis BE4 to the control signals via the SES Functional explanation of the digital control signals Controller types (S, S49 to S5) General, recurrent functions S = : Fixed setpoint controller with independent setpoints S= : Fixed setpoint controller with dependent setpoints S = : DDC fixed setpoint controller S = : Follow-up controller, synchronized controller, SPC-controller S = 4: commanded ratio controller S = 5: Cascade control S = 6: Ratio-cascade control S = 7/8: Override control S = 9: Process display S = : Fixed setpoint controller with setpoint (control system coupling) S = : Follow-up controller without Int/Ext switching (control system coupling) S=: Double fixed setpoint/follow-up controller Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation Control algorithm Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) S = : Continuous (K) controller S = : Three-position step (S) -controller with internal feedback S = : Three-position step (S) controller with external feedback Analog output signal processing (S69 to S75, S47 to S57) Digital output signal processing (S76 to S9 and S58 to S66) Limit value alarms (S94 to S, S67 to S68) Restart conditions (S99, S) Serial interface and PROFIBUS-DP (S to S7) Technical Data General data Standard Controller Technical data of the options modules... SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

6 Contents Manual Installation Mechanical Installation Electrical Connection Connection standard controller Wiring of option modules Alternative connection for I- and U-input Connection of the interface... 6 Operation Process operation Selection level Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode) Paramterization Parameterization mode onpa (online parameters) Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation) Structuring mode ofpa (offline Parameters) Structuring mode PASt (parameter control) Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Structuring mode FdEF (define functions) Structuring mode FCon (connect functions, connection) Structuring mode FPoS (position functions) Structuring mode FPSt (Functions Preset, factory setting) Structuring mode APSt (All Preset, factory setting)..... Set structuring mode CAE4/CAE5 UNI module(s) Measuring range for mv (SEnS=Mv.) Measuring range for U, I (SEnS=Mv.) Measuring range for thermocouple with internal reference point (SEnS=tc.in) Measuring range for thermocouple with external reference point (SEnS=tc.EH) Measuring range for PT-4-wire and PT--wire connection (SEnS=Pt.L/PT.4L) Measuring range for PT--wire connection (SEnS=Pt.L) Measuring range for resistance potentiometer (SEnS=r._ for R < 6 W, SEnS=r. for R<.8 kw) Commissioning Adapting the controller direction of effect to the controlled system Setting the split range outputs and the actuating time in K-controllers (S = ) Adaptation of the S-controller to the actuating drive Setting the filter and the response threshold Automatic setting of control parameters Manual setting of the control parameters Manual setting of the control parameters Maintenance General information and handling Spare parts list... 6 Ordering data... 7 Application examples for configuring the controller Configuring tool Explanation of abbreviations... 5 Index SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

7 Manual Technical Description. Safety notes and scope of delivery Technical Description. Safety notes and scope of delivery WARNING! This device is electrically operated. When operating electrical equipment, certain parts of this equipment automatically carry dangerous voltages. Failure to observe these instructions could therefore lead to serious injury or material damage. Only properly trained and qualified personnel are allowed to work on this equipment. This personnel must be fully conservant with all the warnings and commissioning measures as described in this user s guide. The perfect and safe operation of this equipment is conditional upon proper transport, proper storage, installation and assembly as well as on careful operation and commissioning. D Scope of delivery When the controller is delivered the box contains: Controller as ordered three-pin plug at 5/ V AC or special plug at 4 V UC Clamps, pluggable CD ROM with documentation D Basic equipment The following variants of the SIPART DR are available: Order number 6DR-4 6DR-5 Power Supply 4 V UC 5/ V AC, switchable D Option modules Signal convertors have separate ordering and delivery items. For handling reasons basic equipment and signal convertors which were ordered at the same time may be delivered by separate mail. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

8 Technical Description. Range of Application Manual D Subject to change The user s guide has been compiled with great care. However, it may be necessary within the scope of product care to make changes to the product and its operation without prior notice which are not contained in this user s guide. We are not liable for any costs ensuing for this reason.. Range of Application The SIPART DR is a digitally operating device in the top class range. Its program memory contains a large number of prepared function blocks for calculating, controlling, regulating in technical processes which the user can implement without programming knowledge and additional tools. In addition a robust adaptation procedure is available in this device which makes it much easier to commission even critical controlled systems. The controller determines the optimized control parameters independently on request without the user being expected to have any prior knowledge of how the control loop may respond. The applied procedure is suitable for systems with compensation and aperiodic transient behavior; even greater dead times are taken into account. For more complicated applications the fixed connection of the individual functions can be canceled in the input range and replaced by a free structuring. The user can easily add extra analog function blocks and connect them to each other and to the interfaces of the input range with the software. This achieves optimum adaptation even to complex problems. The named programming possibilities guarantee a great flexibility in the use of the controller and allow fast, easy adapting of the device to the problem so that the SIPART DR can be used universally for control jobs in processing engineering, e.g. as fixed setpoint controller for one, two or three-component control, optionally with two setpoints DDC fixed setpoint controller for one-, two- or three-component control follow-up controller (synchronized controller, SPC controller) with internal/external switching fixed or commanded ratio controller with Internal/External switching cascade controller (double controller) ratio-cascade controller (double controller) override controller with Min or Max selection of the manipulated variable (double controller) double controller with two independent control channels The extensive hardware equipment of the instrument by which numerous interfaces are available for connecting the field cables is of advantage for the universal utilization. The instrument can also be connected to master systems via a plug-in serial interface or operated and monitored centrally by a Personal Computer. The SIPART DR can be used alternatively as a continuous controller with a current output signal or as a three-position step controller for controlling electric motor drives without changing the hardware equipment. 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

9 Manual Technical Description. Design (Hardware). Design (Hardware) The process controller SIPART DR has a modular structure and is therefore maintenance friendly and easy to convert and retrofit. Other signal convertors can be installed in the generously equipped, fully functional standard controller to expand the range of application. These modules are inserted in backplane slots of the enclosed instrument (Fig. -, page ). The standard controller consists of the front module with the control and display elements the main board with CPU and terminal strips the plastic casing with an interface board the power supply unit. The electrical connections between the modules are made by an interface board screwed into the casing. The main board is pushed into rear slot and locked. It holds a -pin and a 4-pin terminal strip to which all inputs and outputs of the standard controller are connected. Five other slots can be equipped with option modules if the number of terminals to the process available in the standard controller are not sufficient for the planned task. The standard controller always has three permanently installed analog inputs (AE) with electronic potential isolation which can be wired alternatively with standardized voltage signals (/. to V or / to V) or current signals (/4 to ma). There are also four digital inputs (BE, /4 V) and eight digital outputs (BA, /4 V, 5 ma) which can be used for different functions depending on the configuration. The SIPART DR also has three analog outputs (AA) which can all supply a current signal from to ma or 4 to ma and be assigned to different variables. A short-circuit-proof Loutput (DC 4 V, ma) is available for supplying transmitters. The power supply unit is located in a fully enclosed metal casing and is screwed tightly to the plastic casing of the controller. This power supply is available in two different versions so that two types of SIPART DR are available: 6DR-4 for power supply connection UC 4 V 6DR-5 for power supply connection AC V, switchable to AC 5 V Many applications can be implemented with the three permanently available analog inputs of the standard controller alone. Two additional input modules can be inserted in slots and for complex jobs or for the connection of other input signals. These input modules are available in addition to for processing normalized current and voltage signals for the direct connection of resistance thermometers Pt and all common thermocouples and resistance sensors or potentiometers. In addition a module with analog inputs (equipment as in the standard controller) can be inserted in slots 5 and 6. This increases the number of inputs to a total of. Slot 4 serves to accommodate an interface module (SES) with V.8-point-pointoutput or SIPART bus interface for serial communication with a master system. A PROFIBUS interface module can be equipped optionally here. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

10 Technical Description. Design (Hardware) Manual The slots 5 and 6 can accommodate signal convertors of different functions and can be equipped optionally with modules for expanding digital inputs or digital outputs. The following assemblies are possible: relays 4 digital outputs/ digital inputs 5 digital inputs analog outputs/ digital inputs analog output with digital fault output (y hold function) with remote supply analog inputs Power supply unit Casing Front module Figure - Front view of the SIPART DR SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

11 Manual Technical Description. Design (Hardware) 9 8 Legend: PE conductor contact spring Slot 6 Slot 5 4 Slot (basic board) 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 4 (SES: RS / RS 485, Profibus DP) 8 Grounding screw 9 DIN rail (delivered with the interface relay) Selector switch Mains voltage Mains plug Power supply unit Figure - Rear view of the SIPART DR SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

12 Technical Description.4 Function principle.4. Standard controller Manual.4 Function principle.4. Standard controller The standard controller consists of three function blocks: Power supply unit Front module Main board Power supply unit Primary clocked power supply plug with high efficiency for AC 5/ V (switchable) or for UC 4 V. It generates the secondary internal supply voltages 4 V and 5 V from the power supply. The metal body is mounted on PE conductors (protection class I). The power supply and internal supply voltages are isolated from each other by safe separation by a protective shield. The internal supply voltages are functional extra-low voltages due to overvoltage cutoff in the event of an error. Since no other voltages are generated in the instrument, these statements apply for all field signal cables (used standards, see chapter.6, page 7). A total of 45 ma are available for the outputs L, AA and BA due to the design for a high power output. Front module The front module contains the control and display elements and the appropriate trigger components for the displays. All display elements are designed in LED technology which provides a longer service life and higher light density as well as a good viewing angle. The control elements are short-stroke switches with a tangible pressure point and high return force. Main board The main board contains the field signal conditioning of the standard controller, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) and the connections (through the interface board) to the module slots. The field signals are fed through protective circuits for external static or dynamic overvoltages and then adapted to the signal levels of the CPU by the appropriate circuits. This adaptation is performed for the analog inputs, the analog outputs and the digital outputs by modern thick-film circuits. The microcontroller used has integrated AD- and DA converters and operates with k batterybacked RAM. The user-specific configuration is stored in an user program memory with a serial 4k EEPROM. When replacing the main board the user memory can be plugged from the old onto the new module. The whole CPU is designed in C-MOS technology. A process image is generated at the start of every routine. The analog and digital inputs and actuation of the front buttons is included and the process variables received from the serial interface are accepted. All calculations are made with these input signals according to the configured functions. Then the data are output to the display elements, the analog outputs and the digital outputs as well as storage of the calculated variables on standby for the serial interface transmitter. The interface traffic runs in interrupt mode. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

13 Manual Technical Description.4 Function principle.4. Description of the option modules A large number of prepared functions for controlling processing plants as well as machines and apparatus is stored in the set value memory of the SIPART DR. The user programs the instrument himself by selecting the desired functions by setting structure switches. The total functioning of the instrument is given by the combination of the individual structure switches. Programming knowledge is not necessary for the settings. All settings are made without an additional programming unit exclusively through the front panel of the SIPART DR or through the serial interface. The job-specific program written in this way is saved in the non-volatile user program memory..4. Description of the option modules The following option modules are described in this chapter 6DR8-8A Module with AE, U- or I-input 6DR8-8J I/U module 6DR8-8R R module 6DR8-8V UNI module 6DR85-8A Reference junction terminal 6DR85-8J Measuring range for TC, internal connector 6DR8-8D Module with BA (relays) 6DR8-8E Module with BE and 4 BA 6DR8-8C Module with 5 BE 6DR8-8A Analog output module with y-hold function 6DR8-8B Module with AA and BE 6DR8-8P Serial interface PROFIBUS-DP 6DR8-8C Serial interface RS / RS 485 6DR84-8A Module with 4 BA relays 6DR84-8B Module with BA relays 6DR8-8A Module with AE, U- or I-input D Inputs for current and voltage To expand the analog inputs. For a description of the module and technical data, see chapter.6., page 9 (Inputs standard controller). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

14 Technical Description.4 Function principle.4. Description of the option modules Manual 6DR8-8J I/U module D Input variables current /4 to ma or voltage /. to V or / to V The input amplifier of the module is designed as a differentiating amplifier with jumperable gain for to V or to V input signal. For current input signals the 49.9 Ω. % impedance is switched on by plug-in bridges on the module. The start value ma or 4 ma or V or. V ( V) is defined by configuration in the standard controller. The differentiating amplifier is designed for common mode voltages up to V and has a high common mode suppression. As a result it is possible to connect the current inputs in series as for electrical isolation when they have common ground. At voltage inputs this circuit technique makes it possible to suppress the voltage dips on the ground rail by twopole wiring on non floating voltage supplies. We refer to an electronic potential isolation. 6DR8-8R R module D Input for resistance or current potentiometer Potentiometers with rated values of 8 Ω to Ω can be connected as resistance potentiometers. A constant current of Is = 5 ma is fed to the potentiometer wiper. The wiper resistance is therefore not included in the measurement. Resistances are switched parallel to the potentiometer by a slide switch on the module and a rough range selection made. Range start and end are set with the two adjusting pots on the back of the module. This fine adjustment can be made by the displays on the front module (with the appropriate structuring). For adjustment with a remote measuring instrument, the analog output can be assigned to the appropriate input. The external wiring must be changed for resistance potentiometers which cannot withstand the 5 ma wiper current or which have a rated resistance > kω. The constant current is then not fed through the wiper but through the whole resistance network of the potentiometer. A voltage divider measurement is now made through the wiper. Coarse adjustment is made by a remote parallel resistor to the resistance potentiometer. This module can also be used as a current input with adjustable range start and full scale. The load is 49.9 Ω and is referenced to ground. 6DR8-8V UNI module D Direct connection of thermocouple or Pt sensors, resistance of mv transmitters Measured value sensors such as thermocouples (TC), resistance thermometers Pt (RTD), resistance potentiometers (R) or voltage transmitters in the mv range can be connected directly. The measuring variable is selected by configuring the controller in the HdeF level (AE4/AE5); the range and the other parameters are set in the CAE4/CAE5 menu. The sensorspecific characteristics (linearization) for thermocouples and Pt resistance thermometers are stored in the contoller s program memory and are automatically taken into account. No settings need to be made on the module itself. 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

15 Manual Technical Description.4 Function principle.4. Description of the option modules The signal lines are connected by a plug terminal block with screw terminals. When using thermocouples with internal reference junction terminal, this terminal block must be replaced by the terminal 6DR85-8A. With the measuring for TC, internal connector 6DR85-8J in place of the terminal block, the measuring range of the direct input (/ to mv) can be extended to /uptovor/4uptoma. The UNI module operates with an AD converter with 8 bit resolution. The measuring inputs and ground of the standard controller are electrically isolated with a permissible common mode voltage of 5 V UC. 6DR85-8A reference junction terminal D Terminal with internal reference junction terminal for thermocouples This terminal is used in connection with the UNI module for temperature measuring with thermocouples at an internal reference junction terminal. It consists of a temperature sensor which is preassembled on a terminal block and plated to avoid mechanical damage. 6DR85-8J measuring for TC, internal connector D measuring for TC, internal connector for current /4 to ma or voltage / to V The measuring for TC, internal connector is used in connection with the UNI module to measure current orvoltage. The input variable is reduced to / to mv by a voltage divider or shunt resistors in the measuring for TC, internal connector. Wiper resistors with 5 Ω or 5 Ω are available optionally at different terminals for /4 to ma signals. The electrical isolation of the UNI module is retained even when the measuring for TC, internal connector is used. 6DR8-8D Module with BA relays D Digital output module with relay contacts To convert digital outputs to relay contacts up to 5 V UC. This module is equipped with relays whose switching contacts have potential free outputs. The RC combinations of the spark quenching elements are respectively parallel to the rest and working contacts. In AC consumers with low power the current flowing through the capacitor of the spark quenching element when the contact is open may interfere (e.g. the hold current of some switching elements is not exceeded). In this case the capacitors ( μf) must be removed and replaced with low capacitance capacitors. The 68 V suppressor diodes parallel to the capacitors act additionally to reduce the induced voltage. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

16 Technical Description.4 Function principle.4. Description of the option modules Manual WARNING! The relays used on the digital output module are designed for a maximum rating up to UC 5 V. The same applies for the air and creep lines on the circuit board. Higher voltages may therefore only be switched through appropriately approved series connected circuit elements under observance of the technical data and the pertinent safety regulations. 6DR8-8E Module with BE and 4 BA D Digital signal module with digital inputs and 4 digital outputs The module serves to extend the digital inputs and digital outputs already existing in the standard controller. The inputs are designed for the 4 V logic and are non-floating. The functions are assigned to the inputs and outputs by the configuration of the controller. The digital outputs are short-circuit-proof and can drive commercially available relays or the interface relays 6DR848A/8B directly. 6DR8-8C Module with 5 BE D Digital input module with 5 digital inputs The module serves to extend the digital inputs already existing in the standard controller. The inputs are designed for the 4 V logic and are non-floating. The function is assigned to the input by the configuration of the controller. 6DR8-8A Analog output module with y-hold function For auxiliary control device function when servicing and for extending the analog outputs AA to AA existing in the standard controller. Can be inserted in slot 5/6, S/S=4 to be set in the structure mode StrS, Start value of the outputs S7/S49 can be set in StrS. The y hold module contains a microprocessor which maintains serial data communication with the processor on the main board through the Rxd/Txd lines. The processor feeds the U/I converter and the CPU fault message output St through its analog output. The module can be externally supplied through an auxiliary voltage input which is ORlinked with the controller power supply. The analog output of the module is freely available. y hold -function If data communication to the y hold processor is interrupted, the analog output receives its last value. The processor reads the current variable first when data traffic is recovered. The output current is maintained if: 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

17 Manual Technical Description.4 Function principle.4. Description of the option modules the self diagnostics of the CPU (see chapter.4., page ) responds. the supply voltage of the SIPART DR fails and the y hold -module is powered externally. all modules except the power supply unit are removed (if the y hold module is powered externally). the y hold module is removed (Attention: electrostatically sensitive module! Observe the safety precautions!), if it is powered externally (error message on the front module op. *.6 Err/oP.*.5, see chapter 5, page 7). *.6 Err/oP.*.5, see chapter 5). In this way it is possible to perform all maintenance work right up to replacing the instrument whilst maintaining the controller controlled variable. Handling during module replacement, see chapter 5 Maintenance. St Fault message output This digital output is always high when there is no error and becomes low in the event of an error. It responds when: the self diagnostics of the CPU (see chapter.4., page ) responds. the controller power supply fails, the Y hold module is removed, the main board is removed. 6DR8-8B Module with AA and BE To extend the analog outputs (/4 to ma) and digital inputs can be inserted in slot 5: AA7, AA8, AA9 BE5, BE6, BE7 and in slot 6: AA4, AA5, AA6 BE, BE, BE 6DR8-8P Serial interface PROFIBUS-DP The module 6DR8-8P is a PROFIBUS-DP interface module with RS 485 driver and electrical isolation to the controller. It operates as an intelligent converter module and adapts the private SIPART to the open PROFIBUS-DP protocol. This optional card can be inserted in all SIPART-DR controllers in slot 4. The following settings must be made with the appropriate configurations for the serial interface: Interface on Even parity LRC without Baud rate 96 Parameters/process values writable (as desired) Station number according to selection to 5 Make sure that the station number is not assigned double on the bus. The PROFIBUS module serves to connect the SIPART controllers to a master system for control and monitoring. In addition the parameters and configuring switches of the controller can be read and written. Up to process variables can be selected and read out cyclically by configuration of the PROFIBUS module. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

18 Technical Description.4 Function principle.4. Description of the option modules Manual The process data are read out of the controller in a polling procedure with an update time < ms. If the master writes process data to the slave, these become active after a maximum controller cycle. The description and the controller base file (*.GSD) can be downloaded from Internet under A technical description including the controller base file (*.GSD) is available for creating a master-slave linking software for interpreting the identifications and useful data from and to the SI- PART controller. The programs SIPART S5 DP and S7 DP are offered for certain hardware configurations. 6DR8-8C Serial interface RS / RS 485 D Serial interface for RS or RS 485 with electrical isolation Canbeinsertedinslot4. For connecting the controller SIPART DR to a master system for control and monitoring. All process variables can be sent, the external setpoint, tracking variable, operating modes, parameters and configurations sent and received. The interface traffic can take place as follows: RS SIPART Bus RS 485 as point-to-point connection The SIPART bus is no longer available. Therefore please implement multipoint connections via RS 485 or PROFIBUS DP. As a serial data bus with up to users. The interface module 6DR8-8C offers electrical isolation between Rxd/Txd and the controller. Switching can be performed between RS, SIPART bus and RS 485 with a plug-in bridge. A detailed technical description of the telegram traffic is available for creating an interface software. 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

19 Manual Technical Description.4 Function principle.4. Description of the option modules RS 485 5R 4 V 7.5 V RS 485 Txd 4 V V 7.5 V -7.5 V 7.5V SIPART bus RS Txd Txd V 7.5 V 7.5 V 8 Rxd/ Txd A Rxd/ Txd B -7.5 V 7 Rxd Rxd V 8 Rxd Rxd/ Txd, 7 NC Other connections: NC Other connections: NC Figure - Block diagram serial interface for RS / SIPART BUS Figure -4 Block diagram serial interface for RS 485 6DR84-8A 6DR84-8B Module with 4 BA relays Module with BA relays D Interface relay module with or 4 relays To convert or 4 binary outputs to relay contacts up to V UC. The module can be snapped onto a mounting rail on the back of the controller. The mounting rail is delivered with the interface relay module. One or two relay modules with relays each are installed depending on the version. Every relay has a switching contact with spark quenching in both switching branches. In AC consumers with a very low power, the current flowing (e.g. hold current in contactors) through the spark quenching capacitor (nf) when the contact is open interferes. In this case they should be replaced by capacitors of the same construction type, voltage strength and lower value. The switching contact is fed to the plug terminals with poles so that rest and working circuits can be switched. The relays can be controlled directly from the controller s digital outputs by external wiring. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

20 Technical Description.4 Function principle.4. CPU self-diagnostics Manual WARNING! The relays used on the interface relay module are designed for a maximum rating of AC 5 V in overvoltage class III and contamination factor according to DIN EN 6 Part. The same applies for the air and creep lines on the circuit board. Resonance increases up to twice the rated operating voltage may occur when phase shift motors are controlled. These voltages are available at the open relay contact. Therefore such motors may only be controlled under observance of the technical data and the pertinent safety conditions via approved switching elements..4. CPU self-diagnostics The CPU runs safety diagnostics routines which either can only after a reset or cyclically. The CPU is familiar with two different types of reset. Power on reset Power-On-Reset always takes place when the 5-V supply drops below 4.45 V, i.e. the power supply is interrupted for longer than specified in the technical data. All parameters and configurations are reloaded from the user program memory into the RAM. At S = the digital x-display flashes as indication after a Power-On-Reset, it is acknowledged by the Shift key (). Flashing is suppressed by S =. Watch dog reset When a watch-dog-reset occurs the parameters and configurations from the user program memory are reloaded into the RAM. The current process variables and the status signals are read out of the RAM for further processing. There are no flashing signals on the front module. CPU-tESt appears in the digital displays dd and dd for a maximum 5 s after every reset. Every error detected by the self-diagnostics leads to a flashing error message on the digital displays dd and dd with defined states of the analog and digital outputs. The fault message output St of the y hold module becomes low. The reactions listed in the table are only possible of course (since this is a self-test) if the errors occur in such a way that the appropriate outputs or the front module can still be controlled properly or the outputs themselves are still functioning. There are other error messages for the input range which indicate defective structurings within this range (see chapter.5.6 Error messages, page 99). In addition error messages are output in the adaptation (see chapter.. Parameterization mode AdAP, page 7). The digital displays flash in the case of error messages. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

21 Manual Technical Description.4 Function principle.4.4 Data storage, User program memory.4.4 Data storage, User program memory All data are written in the RAM first and then transfered to the user program memory (EEPROM) when returning to the process operation mode (manually or via the SES). Writing time The writing time after leaving the parameterization and configuring modes is up to s. Then the data are stored in a non-volatile memory. Error messages of the CPU Error mes- sages dd dd Monitoring of Monitoring time St y hold -module AA4/7 with U H AA4/7 without U H Reactions Standard controller AA to BA to 8 Options ) BA9 to BA to 6 Primary Error cause/ Remedy CPU Err MEM Err op.5.*. ) EEPROM, RAM EPROM User program memory Data communication μp-slot 5 Power On-Reset Watch Dog-Reset Power On-Reset Watch Dog-Reset when storing cyclic Data com- op.*.6. ) munication cyclic μp-slot 6 last value last value ma last value ma last value continues operating with current data pulled last value defective, undefined pulled ma ma ma continues operating with current data continues operating with current data continues opera- ting with current data last state or undefined continues operating with current data last state or undefined Monitored components of the CPU defective/change main board User program memory not plugged or defective/plug or change Monitored components of the CPU defective/change main board User program memory not plugged or defective/plug or change Option not plugged, defective or setting in hdef op5 does not match the plugged option. Plug option or replace or correct op5 ) Option not plugged, defective or setting in hdef op5 does not match the plugged option. Plug option or replace or correct op6 ) ) Also double error display op.5.6 possible, * means digit dark. ) At BE5 to 9 and BE to 4 the effect of the digital inputs (after inversion) are set to in the event of an error. Table - Error message of the CPU SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

22 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing permanently connected Manual.5 Functional description of the structure switches (S to S7, S to S68) In the factory setting (setting when the device is delivered) most of the structure switches are set to. This corresponds to the most usual setting of the individual functions so that only few structure switches need to be set selectively during commissioning. However, it is recommendable to compare the individual structure switch settings with the task. With structure switch S the user program can be identified by a number from to 54 in the structuring mode Strs. The setting corresponds to the factory setting and is regenerated automatically in the APSt function (All Preset). All changes in parameters or structures in relation to the factory setting automatically set S from to. The structure switches S and S are fundamentally significant. With S the controller type is set and thus the processing of command variable, main controlled variable and auxiliary controlled variables up to control difference generation determined. With S the controller output structure is set and thus the processing of the automatic-, manual-, safety- and followup variables as well as the manipulated variable output determined as a K- or S-output..5. Analog input signal processing permanently connected (S to S, S to 5) In the structure switch setting S4= the analog input range is permanently connected (see figure -5, page 4). With S4= the permanent connection is canceled and converted into a freely connectable input range (see chapter.5., page 5). Every one of the maximum analog inputs is fed through an AD converter which performs the 5 or 6 Hz interference suppression by averaging over or 6 / ms. After this the signal range to ma or 4 to ma is normalized to to % calculated value per channel with S5 to S9 or S to S5. At the same time it is decided with S5 to S9 or S to S5 whether operation is to take place with or without range monitoring (transmitter fault). The monitor signals per channel on dropping below.5 % or exceeding 6.5 % with a hysteresis of.5 % to the digital x and w display. By an OR link of all single messages the group transmitter fault MUF is formed which can be assigned to the digital outputs and negated optionally (see chapter.5.8, page ). Only the analog inputs selected with the transmitter fault monitor are monitored, displayed on the front panel (the appropriate position stays dark in the case of analog inputs not selected with transmitter fault) and signaled with the OR link. The error message is acknowledged with the Shift key (). The fault message signal via the OR link is available until the appropriate analog inputs are back in the working range. After the range monitoring the analog inputs are fed through a st order filter which can be set by the parameters tf to tfb in the range of off,. to s in the parameterization mode onpa. The factory setting is s. With S to S4 or S6 to S every channel can now be root extracted optionally. After root extraction, the analog inputs are available for further processing as AEA to AEbA. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

23 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing permanently connected The function inputs FE and FE are preceded by a linearizer which enables non-linear process variables to be displayed physically correctly (for operating method see chapter.5., page 5) function block Fu, setting of the vertex values, see chapter.5.4, figure -9, page 45 to figure -, page 46). The outputs of the analog inputs AEA to AEbA are now assigned to the function inputs FE to FE by the structure switches S5 to S9 or S to S7. The outputs AEA to AEbA and the function inputs FE to FE are available for the assignment to analog outputs, the limit value alarm and the parameter control and can be read through the SES. With this input structure most control tasks can be solved in connection with the different controller types and controller output structures. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

24 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing permanently connected Manual AE I, U / /9 AE I, U / / AE I, U /4 / AE4 I, U, R, P, T AE5 I, U, R, P, T AE6 I, U AE7 I, U AE8 I, U AE9 I, U AE I, U AE I, U U U Slot A D, S5, 4bismA o% AEA AEA AEA AEbA o% S5. to. S U U Slot U Slot 6 A D A function inputs Slot 5 A D A A A D D D D, S6 4tomA,, S7 4tomA,, S8, 4tomA, S9, 4tomA, S, 4bismA..., S5, 4tomA tf tf tf tf4 tf5 tf6 tfb Outputs of the analog outputs S AEA S AEA S AEA S AE4A S4 AE5A S6 AE6A (AEA) AEbA S S4 = drawn at S4 = freely AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A AE6A AE8A AE9A AEA AEA AEA AEbA o% AEA AEA AEA AEbA o% AEA AEA AEA AEbA o% AEA AEA AEA AEbA o% AEA AEA AEA AEbA o% AEA AEA AEA AEbA S6 S7 FE FE FE FE4 Z. to. S S8 S9 S S AE7A FE5 y N FE6 y R S, see fig. -4 (pg. 48) to fig. -44 (pg. 8) FE7 see fig. -5 (pg. 9) see fig. -58 (pg. ) to fig. -6 (pg. 9) FE... connectable AEAA (AEA) AEbA (AEA) Figure -5 Analog input signal processing permanently connected (S4 = ) 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

25 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ).5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ) The structure switch setting S4= cancels the permanent connection at S4= in the analog input range and replaces it with a freely connectable input range. The freely connectable input range basically represents a multifunctional unit, configuring takes place according to the same rules. Up to the outputs AEA to AEbA (AEA), the signal processing is identical to that described in chapter.5., page. The function inputs FE to FE also operate in the same way with the difference that FE5 (follow-up input) and FE6 (position feedback input) can be used in parallel and with the difference that FE5 (followup input) and FE6 (position feedback input) can be used in parallel and connected with different signals. Nine different function blocks which occur with different frequency can now be connected absolutely freely between the outputs AEA to AEbA and the function inputs FE to FE. The outputs AEA to AEbA represent data sources whilst the function inputs FE to FE are data sources. Parallel to the outputs, 5 connectable linear parameters are arranged with a setting range of to (corresponding to % to %), a number of normal constants as well as other variables gained from the controller as data source. The function blocks have a different number of inputs (data sinks) and output each (data source) depending on the function depth. The function blocks function transmitter and correction computer have assigned parameters which can be set in the structuring mode ofpa. The connectable parameters P to P5 are set in the parameterization mode onpa. By structuring on the front module the necessary functions are selected or defined (structuring mode FdEF), connected (structuring mode FCon) and correctly positioned in time in the cycle (structuring mode FPoS), see chapter..7, page to..9, page 5. Connection is absolutely free, i.e. any data source can be connected with any data sink. The operating effort is minimized by fading the data sources and sinks from undefined function blocks. In addition the data sinks which are not obliagatory for a function are preoccupied by constants which can be overwritten. The inputs preoccupied with ncon (not connected) are absolutely essential for the function and must be connected. This very variable connection facility in the analog input range also enables complex control tasks to be solved. No distinction is made between analog and digital signals. Digital inputs have a threshold value of.5. Digital outputs supply a value of % () or % (). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

26 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ) Manual Data sources Data sinks Data sources Data sinks AE AE AE AE4 AE.A AE.A AE.A AE4.A Ar.F Ar to Ar6 nr Ar. E Ar. E E EE-E4 A E Ar. E5 E4 Ar.4 Ar.6 Ar.5 E5 FE FE FE AE5 AE6 AE5.A AE6.A Fu.F Fu, Fu nr Fu. E A E A Fu. FE4 FE5 Analog signals AE AEb.A Parameter: Vertex value at -,, to 9,, FE6 Connectable parameters P. P5, MA.F MA to MA nr MA. E MA. E A Max MA.4 MA. E FE7 FE8 Constants..5 BE Mi.F Mi to Mi nr Mi. E Mi. E Min. A Mi.4 Mi. E FE9 Digital inputs Fault message. BE9 AE. AE5 re.f re re. ΔP re. E E f(e E) re. Parameter. ta, te, PA, PE x A nr re.4 FE FE FE Analog or digital signals Alarms A to A4 Status message Setpoints w/w Manipulated variable y *) Serial analog value AE A. A4 Int Int SPI SPI SP SP yi yii SAA. SAA4 AS.F AS to AS5 nr AS. E AS. E A AS.4 AS. E SPI /: internal setpoint controller / SP /: active setpoint Co.F Co, Co nr controller/ Co. E A Co. E - Co.4 Co. E H *) y: Manipulated value y controller na.f na, na nr na. E na na.. E E & A na.4 no.f no, no nr no. E E A no. E no. no.4 *) y: Manipulated value y controller (for S = ) Figure -6 Analog input signal processing freely connectable (S4=) 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

27 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ) The individual function blocks are described below..5.. Arithmetic Ar to Ar6 ncon ncon... ArtoAr6 Ar.F nr Ar. E E Ar. E E EE-E4 A Ar.6 Ar. E5 Ar.4 E4 Ar.5 E5 E E E - E4 A= E5 E5 is limited to values.5 %. Figure -7 Function block Arithmetic Ar to Ar6 With this function block the four basic arithmetic functions are implemented with appropriate assignment of inputs and respectively. The preset E=E4=, E5= gives A = E E. Typical process-technical applications are dosing or evaluation (E E), range fade-outs (E EE) or differentiations (E - E4)..5.. Function transmitter Fu and Fu ncon Fu, Fu Fu.F nr Fu. E A A Fu. E A=f(E) -,, bis 9,, ofpa Figure -8 Function block function transmitter The function transmitter assigns every value of the input variable E in the range from - % to % an output variable A in the range from -99,9 % to 99,9 % with the function entered by the user: A = f(e). The function is entered by the parameters vertex value to for - % to % of E in intervals of %. Parabolae are set by the computing program between these vertex values which interlink tangentially the vertex values so that a constant function is produced. The vertex values at - % and % of E are required for the overflow. The last rise remains constant in the case of further overmodulation of E. When used as a linearizer for the displays, the linearization function is entered by the vertex values so that the series circuiting of the sensor function gives a linear equation with the linearization function (see chapter.5.4, figure - to figure -, page 46)..5.. Maximum value selection MA to MA ncon ncon.5 MA.F to MA.F MA.F nr MA. E E A MA. Max MA.4 E MA. A = max (E,E, E) The greatest of the three input values is connected through to the output. Figure -9 Function block maximum value selection With the preset the greater value of E or E is connected through to A and at the same time limited to the value of E (-5 %). Typical applications are maximum value selection circuits and minimum value limitings. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

28 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ) Manual If only inputs are required, the rd input must be set outside the working range of the two inputs to a minimum value otherwise minimum value limiting takes place Minimum value selection Mi to Mi ncon ncon.5 Mi.F to Mi.F Mi.F nr Mi. E Mi. E Min. A Mi..4 E Mi. A = min (E, E, E) The smallest of the three input values is connected through to the output. Figure - Function block minimum value selection With the preset the smaller value of E or E is connected through to A and at the same time limited to the value of E (5%). Typical applications are minimum value selection circuits. If only inputs are required, the rd input must be set outside the working range to a maximum value, otherwise a maximum value limiting takes place Correction computer for ideal gases re. ncon ncon re re.f re. re. re. E E ta, te, PA, PE ΔP f(e E) x A nr re.4 (ofpa) A = Δp f (E, E) f(e, E) = (PE PA) E PA (te ta) E ta Figure - Function block correction computer re for ideal gases The rooted signal of the active pressure must be applied at input c**.. The measuring ranges are normalized to the calculation state with the parameters PA, PE, ta, te (correction quotients start/end for pressure and temperature). Range of Application The correction computer is used to calculate the flow of gases from the active pressure Δp depending on pressure and temperature. The medium must be in pure phase, i.e. so that no liquid separations may take place. This should be noted particularly for gases close to the saturation point. Errors due to fluctuating status variables of the medium (pressure, temperature) are corrected by the flow correction computer here. 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

29 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ) q Pressure p Temperature t Active pressure Δp Kp/cm Measured value transmission t Δp Calculation e Function block re q Figure - Active pressure measuring method, Principle Physical notes The active pressure measuring method is based on the law of continuity and Bernoulli s energy equation. According to the law of continuity the flow of a flowing liquid in a pipe is the same at all places. If the cross-section is reduced at one point, the flow speed at this point should increase. According to Bernoulli s energy equation the energy content of a flowing material is made up of the sum of the kinetic energy (due to the speed) and the potential energy (of the pressure). An increase in speed therefore causes a reduction in pressure. This drop in pressure, the so-called active pressure Δp is a measure of the flow q. The following applies: q = c Δp with c as a factor which depends on the dimensions of the pipe, the shape of the constriction, the density of the flowing medium and some other influences. The equation states that the active pressure generated by the constriction is in the same ratio as the square of the flow. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

30 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ) Manual Δp q Figure - Relationship between flow q and active pressure Δp To measure the flow, a choke is installed at the measuring point which constricts the pipe and has two connections for tapping the active pressure. If the properties of the choke and the measuring material are known to the extent that the equation specified above can be calculated, the active pressure is a measure of the flow. If you have chosen a certain choke, the flow can be described in the calculation state or operation state. q B = K ρ B Δp or q = K ρ Δp Since the density is included in the measuring result according to the above equation, measuring errors occur when the density in the operating state differs from the value based on the calculation of the choke. Therefore a correction factor F is introduced for the density in operating condition. F= B V B V = with V= as specific volume. as specific volume. In order to be able to perform the correction with the factor F, the current specific volume must be determined first. For the dry gases the densities change according to the laws for ideal gases: V = R T p = ρ The correction factor is then given as: F = T B p T with p as absolute pressure and T as absolute temperature. pb SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

31 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ) V B m /kg Correction range P abs.a P abs.b P abs.e P abs. bar q Flow ρ Density Δp Active pressure p Pressure  Temperature (_C) T Temperature (K) V Specific volume R Gas constant F Correction factor f (p, T)   A  B  E _C P abs.a to P abs.e Range of pressure of the transmitter  A to  E Range of temperature of the transmitter Indices: A Start E End B Calculation state abs Absolute variable m Ground v Volume Figure -4 Display of the correction range This gives for the corrected flow q = F K ρ B Δp = K ρ B Δp T B p PB T The factor contained in the formula K ρ B is already taken into account in the measurement of the active pressure and can therefore be ignored by the computer. Related to the correction factor it follows: A = Δp f (E, E) with F = f(e, E) = (PE PA) E PA (te ta) E ta The measuring ranges are normalized to the calculation state with the parameters PA, PE, ta, te (correction quotients start/end for pressure and temperature). Mass flow computer, m A = q m, E = p, E =  PA = P absa P B, PE = P abse P B, ta = T A T B, te = T E T B with T A E B [K] SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

32 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ) Manual Volume flow computer related to the operating status q V Since the volume is reciprocally proportional to the density, a volume flow computer can be made out of this mass flow computer by changing the inputs E and E. A = q v, E = Â, E = p PA = T A T B, PE = T E T B with T A E B [K], ta = P absa P B, te = P abse P B Volume flow computer related to the standard status q VN Since the output signal is now related to the volume flow in the standard status, T N = 7. 5 K, P N =.5 bar abs and no longer to the operating state, it must be corrected accordingly. A = q VN, E = p, E =  ta = T A T B, te = T E T B with T A E B [K], PA = P absa P B, PE = P abse P B The following applies for all computers: p absa to p abse T A to T E p B,T B Transmitter range absolute pressure (bar) Transmitter range absolute temperature (K) is formed from the transmitter range  A to  E by conversion: T(K) = 7, 5  (_C) Pressure and temperature range of the calculation state of the measuring panel (absolute values) p B and T B must be within the range of the transmitter; and may not be more than the factor away from the range limits. PA, ta =. to PE, te = to The input re. Δp is limited to values. If the adjustable ranges for PA, PE, ta, te are not sufficient a linear equation can be switched in front of the appropriate input for adaptation (function block Ar). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

33 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = ).5..6 Switch for analog variables AS to AS5 E (<,5) (,5) A E E ncon ncon. AS.F to AS5.F AS.F nr AS. E E A AS. AS.4 E AS Comparator with adjustable hysteresis Co, Co (two-position switch, e.g. limit value sensor) Inputs E (E H/) E<(E H/) Output A H= E = hysteresis) ncon ncon.5 Co.F to Co.F Co.F nr Co. E A E Co. - Co.4 E Co. H.5..8 AND NOT function (NAND) na, na A=E E E =E E E with default: A = E (Negation of E) E E E A ncon.. na.f to na.f na.f nr E na. E A na. & na.4 E na OR NOT function (NOR) no, no A=E E E =E E E with default: A = E (Negation of E) E E E A ncon.. no.f to no.f no.f nr E no. E A no. no.4 E no. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

34 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Digital input signal processing Manual.5. Digital input signal processing (S4 to S48, S9 to S).5.. Digital inputs BE to BE4 The inputs BE to BE4 are located on the basic board. BE5 to 9 and to 4 are connected to the module 6DR8-8C at the slots 5 or 6. The digital output modules 6DR8-8E also contain another two digital inputs in addition to the outputs so that in this case the two digital inputs BE5/BE6 or BE/BE can be used. 4 V /5 /6 /7 /8 BE BE BE BE4 5V be be be be4 Slot 5 AA BE 6DR88B Slot 5 4BA BE 6DR8-8E Slot 5 6DR88C 5BE 4 V 5/ 5/ 5/ BE5 BE6 BE7 4 V 5V 5/ 5/6 BE5 BE6 4 V 4 V 5V 5V 5/ 5/ 5/ 5/4 5/5 BE5 BE6 BE7 BE8 BE9 5V be5 be6 be7 be8 be9 S = 6 S = S = 6/ 6/ 6/ Slot 6 AA BE 6DR88B BE BE BE 4 V 5V 6/ 6/6 Slot 6 4BA BE 6DR8-8E BE BE 4 V 4 V 5V 5V 6/ 6/ 6/ 6/4 6/5 Slot 6 6DR88C 5BE 4 V BE BE BE BE BE4 5V be be be be be4 S = 6 S = S = Figure -5 Input function digital inputs 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

35 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Digital input signal processing.5.. Assignment and direction of effect of the digital inputs see fig. -6, page 7 The control signals CB, He...yBLII, -yblii are assigned by the structure switches S4 to S8 and S9 to S8 to the digital inputs BE to BE4 or the status Lo. In the assignment of CB (S4), CBII (S9), PI (S), PII (S), wsli (S5) and wslii (S6) the High status (S** = ) is also possible. The control signals can be negated optionally by the structure switches S9 to S46 and S9 to S. The digital inputs BE to BE4 of the standard controller can be extended with the option modules 6DR8-8C, 6DR8-8E, 6DR8-8B in slot 5 and in slot 6. When using option modules in slots 5 and 6 the structure switches S and S must be set according to the assembly, otherwise it will lead to error messages (see chapter.4., page ). All digital inputs can be read by the SES..5.. Linking the digital inputs BE bis BE4 to the control signals via the SES (S47 to S49, S) see fig. -7, page 8 The control signals CB and N may be available optionally as static signals or as a pulse (key operation on consoles) at the digital inputs. The setting is made by S47 for CB and S48 for N. On selecting the pulse input, every positive edge flips the flip-flop. In the following descriptions the output status of the flipflop is assumed as CB or N. All control signals except Δw and Δy can also be preset by the SES at S =,, 4, 5 and OR linked with the appropriate control signals through the digital inputs. The incremental adjustment of w or y by the SES is not advisable on account of the bus run times. Since the top operation hierarchy in a computer link should be with the autarcic single controller, the control signals can be switched off by the SES by rounding with RC = Int CB via the Internal/External key () of the controller or via CB ES (optionally time-monitored) or via CB BE (central Computer Fail line). In addition the internal flip-flop can be activated at S = to 5 parallel to pressing the keys via IntES. The CB signal is formed at S =, 4 as an OR function of CB ES via the serial interface and CB BE via a digital input so that operation can take place optionally with one signal. At S =, 5 the OR function is replaced by an AND function so that the CB set by the SES can be reset via a central Computer Fail line. The function RC = Int CB (computer operation) also controls the command variable switching in all controller types, i.e. also in SPC-mode or manipulated variable switching in DDC mode (see chapter.5.4, page 4). The two controller types S = / operate without command variable switching. The Internal key and the control signal CB are available with the link RC = Int CB for locking operation through the serial interface (e. g. when coupling to control systems). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

36 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Digital input signal processing Manual At S47 = static switching takes place due to the logic function RC = Int CB. In the case of the preset to Int(Internal LED () off) you can switch statically with CB between controller values and computer values (command and manipulated variables). The computer standby CB is displayed negated by the C-LED () (C = CB, CB = = C LED off). The computer standby of the controller is signaled negated as a message signal RB = Int. The computer mode is also signaled negated as a message signal RC = Int CB. At S47 = static switching with acknowledgement takes place. Every time the computer is recovered (CB from! ) the internal flipflop is set to (Internal LED on, C LED off) so that the computer mode RC = Int CB only becomes active after pressing the Internal key (Int=). With S49 the Internal/External key can be switched out of function and only internal or external operation preselected. The control signal H is generated as an OR-function by the Manual-/Automatic key (9) with subsequent flip-flop (Hi) and the control signal He whereby He can be preset by the SES or the digital inputs in the way described above. With the structure switch S64 Automatic-/Manual switching can be blocked in the positions only Automatic (H = ) or only Manual (H = ). The Manual LED (8) always indicates the active status (see also chapter.5.6, page 99). At S64 = to, He is connected statically by both the SES and the digital inputs. At S64 = /4 the connection is made dynamically, i.e. every positive edge causes manual-automatic-manual opeeration switching. Additionally interlocking of He ES with RC =Int CB is canceled at structure switch S64 = 4. 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

37 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Digital input signal processing S** assignment with ) BE BE BE BE4 4 BE5 5 BE6 6 BE7 7 BE8 8 BE9 9 BE BE BE BE BE4 4 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S S S S S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S8 S9 S S9 S4 S4 S4 S4 S4 S44 S44 S45 S45 S46 S46 S9 S4 CB BE He BE N BE Si BE PI BE PII BE Δw BE Δw BE Δy BE Δy BE ybl BE ybl BE CBII BE HeII BE accordingtofig.-7, Page 8 bls BE blps BE PAU BE according to fig. -7, Page 8 blb BE FE9 5 FE 6 FE 7 FE 8 S S S S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S4 S4 S9 S9 S S S46 S46 NII BE SiII BE /tsi BE /tsii BE wsli BE wslii BE yblii BE yblii BE accordingtofig.-7, Page 8 Figure -6 Assignment and direction of effect S4 to S8 and S8 to S8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

38 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Digital input signal processing Manual Δw BE -Δw BE Δy BE -Δy BE from fig. -6, p. 7 He BE (I/II) Si BE (II) blb BE bls BE blps BE P I BE PII BE PAU BE ybl BE (II) -ybl BE (II) tshi BE **) tshii BE **) WSLI BE WSLII BE N BE (II) CB BE (II) SES He ES Si ES tshii ES N ES CB ES / / S48 S S47 Int ES //4/5 S / S49 //4/5 IntII ES / S S S47 / *) as of software version D6 **) as of software version C9 Figure -7 blb ES bls ES blps ES // 4/5 & 4 S64 /5 / /4 - ///4 /(4/5) / S S64 // /4 S64 // only active in CB Int or CB Int II & S S7*) & S64 C ge & & & /(4/5) / / S / S / S /(4/5) /(4/5) /(4/5) S Linking the digital inputs BE to BE4 with the control signals via the SES (S47, S48, S49, S) gn Δw -Δw Δy -Δy ///4 Si (II) blb bls blps P I PII PAU ybl (II) -ybl (II) tshi tshii WSLI WSLII N(II) CB (II) S64 ge H (II) active control signals for the switching functions in the controller RC=Int CB (single controller) RC=Int II CB (cascade) RB=Int (single controller) or Int II (cascade) 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

39 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5. Digital input signal processing.5..4 Functional explanation of the digital control signals blb bls blps CB He N Si tshi/ii w SL I/II PI PII PAU Blocking operation Blocking the entire device operation and configuring. Exception: Display of circuit Blocking structuring With this signal the controller only allows switching to the online parameterization levels outside process operation. In this way the parameters for adapting the instrument to the process and the necessary settings for the adaptation can be selected. Structuring is blocked. Blocking parameterization and structuring The entire configuring of the device is blocked, this means the parameterization as well. Only the normal process operation according to the preselected controller type is permitted. Computer standby Depending on the controller type this digital signal together with the Internal/External key effects either switching in the setpoint range or DDC operation begins. Central computer fail line in SPC and DDC operation. Manual external This signal blocks the output of the controller and enables direct manual adjustment of the manipulated variable on the front control panel. Follow-up With this signal the output of the Kcontroller and the three-position step controller with external position feedback is followed up to the follow-up signal y N. Safety operation In K-controllers and three-position step controllers with external position feedback, the manipulated variable adopts the parameterized safety value. In three-position step controllers with internal position simulation, the manipulated variable runs defined to or %. Setpoint ramp/setpoint changes Setpoint changes via the setpoint ramp can be stopped by a binary input. External setpoint preselection Preselect whether external setpoint via analog input or SES/incremental. P-operation controller I With this signal the controller I (parameter set I) is switched to P-operation. P-operation controller II With this signal the controller II (parameter set II) is switched to P-operation. Parameter switching The programmable controller types include single controllers and double controllers (meshed controllers). Single controllers operate with the parameter set I and can be switched by this digital signal to the parameter set II. Double controllers are permanently assigned to the parameter sets I and II; the switching possibility is then omitted. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

40 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Δw Δy ybl Incremental setpoint adjustment External setpoint or nominal ratio preset for incremental adjustment via digital inputs Incremental manipulated variable adjustment External manipulated variable default for incremental adjustment through digital inputs in follow-up operation. Direction-dependent blocking of the manipulated variable Direction-dependent limiting of the manipulated variable by external signals, e.g. from the limit switches of the actuating drives. This limiting is effective in every operating mode. Signals with identification II relate logically to controller II at S =. Corresponding SES signals are only effective when CBII= and IntII=..5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5).5.4. General, recurrent functions Manual setpoint preset wi or nominal ratio preset wvi on the control front panel. The internal setpoint can always be adjusted with the Δw-keys (6 Fig. -) when the green internal LED () lights up. The adjusting facility is marked by in the tables. Exceptions to this rule are expressly mentioned in the individual controller types. The adjustment operates incrementally, in the first step with a resolution of digit and then an adjustment progression so that major changes can also be performed fast enough. After every interruption in the adjustment by releasing the keys, the progression starts again with the smallest adjustment step. Setpoint preset wi or nominal ratio preset wvi by the SES Every time the internal setpoint can be adjusted by the keys (6) on the control front panel, it is also possible to make a preset with the SES. Since only absolute and not incremental adjustment is possible with the SES, it is advisable to use the setpoint ramp ts to avoid steps. In addition the control signal Int and the automatic/manual switching can be preset with the manual manipulated variable adjustment with the SES so that a complete parallel process operation is possible with the SES (see also chapter.5.6 Controller output structure, section Control system coupling via the serial interface on page ). Source for the external setpoint S5 and S The external setpoint we can come from a maximum of three different sources in the different controller types: external setpoint as an absolute value via the analog inputs (w EA ) Selection with S5 external setpoint incremental via the control signals Δw (w EΔ ) external setpoint as an absolute value via the SES (wes) SES (w ES )selection with S In double controllers (S = ) you can switch between w ES and w EA respectively with control signal w SLI or w SLII. Setpoint ramp ts (accordingly tsii at S = ) With the parameter ts (ofpa) the adjusting speed of the effective setpoint w (in ratio controller S = 4 the effective nominal ratio) can be set in the range of off,. to 9984 min over 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

41 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) to %. At the same time, ts presets the floating time for to % change in incremental setpoint adjustment via the control signals Δw. At ts = off the adjustment speed goes to. With the setpoint ramp, setpoint switchings can be effected to non-followed-up variables SH and wi, w EΔ,w ES at S5 = and w EA, if the supplying controller has not been followed up not suddenly but with the set ramp. w w E tan α = % ts = Δw tw S H Δw external Setpoint μ tw safe Setpoint t t w = Δw ts % Figure -8 Setpoint switching with ramp With the control signals ts and tsii the set setpoint ramps can be switched off. Setpoint limits SA, SE (accordingly SAII, SEII at S = ) With the parameters SA and SE (ofpa) the effective setpoint w can be limited to minimum value (SA) and maximum value (SE) in the range from - to %. Exception: Ratio controller (S = 4) and ratio cascade, commanded ratio controller (S = 6) Follow-up of the ineffective setpoint to the active setpoint (S5) (accordingly S5 at S = ) Normally the ineffective setpoint is followed up to the effective setpoint so that the setpoint switching is bumpless. The internal setpoint (wi), the external setpoint incrementally adjustable via Δw (w EΔ ) and the external setpoint via the SES (w ES ) can be followed up. The safety setpoint SH cannot be followed up. The external setpoint w EA via the analog inputs can only be followed up indirectly by following up the supplying device on the output side. To do this the effective w is used as a follow-up variable, assigned to an analog output and as a followup control signal the OR-operation H N Si, assigned to a digital output. At S5 = the follow-up is suppressed. This switch setting is always required especially in follow-up controllers if the internal setpoint represents a kind of safety function or if multiple setpoint operation is to be run in follow-up controller (S = ). x-tracking (S5) (accordingly S at S = ) With the structure switch S5 =, x-tracking (ratio controller xv-tracking) can be switched on. This means that the setpoint is followed up to the actual value or the nominal ratio is followed up to the actual ratio and therefore a control difference xd is reset to. The follow up always takes place when there is no automatic operation (A). This is the case in manual mode (H), follow-up mode (N), DDC mode and in operation with safety manipulated variable (Si): A =H N Si SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 4

42 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual x-tracking in direction-dependent blocking operation is not possible because the P-step produced by resetting the driving control error to blocking direction would immediately cancel the blocking. x-tracking takes place without the set setpoint ramp ts. By following up the setpoint to the actual value (nominal ratio to actual ratio), the control difference xd = and automatic operation starts absolutely bumplessly. Since one can usually assume in manual mode and DDC mode that the actual value has been driven to the desired value, the followed up setpoint corresponds to the rated value. x-tracking only takes full effect if the follow-up of the inactive setpoint is locked onto the active setpoint (S5 = ) so that not only the active setpoint w but also the setpoint source which is supplying after switching to automatic operation is followed up. At S5 = (without follow-up) the control difference is during the A-operation but after switching to the automatic mode the old non-followed up setpoint is immediately active again. With the setpoint ramp ts this step-shaped setpoint change takes place via a time ramp. This combination is always useful when it is not guaranteed during A-operation (especially in safety mode) that the actual value will be driven to the desired rated value by the actuating manipulation and the follow-up variable would not be correct in full x-tracking. Constants c to c7 In the individual controller types the process variables are partially linked with each other whereby the constants c to c are used for the controlled variable links and constants c4 and c5 for the command variable links. The constants are set in the parameterization mode onpa in the range from to The constants c6, c7 serve to dose the disturbance variable connection to the controller output yi or yii (see chapter.5.5., figure -5, page 9 and figure -5, page 9). They can be set in the parameterization mode onpa in the range from to Control signals for the setpoint switching If available in the single controller types, the setpoint switching takes place depending on the control signals Int (Internal/External key) and CB (Computer standby) as an AND function RC = Int CB and its negation. The status of the control signal CB and the Internal key () is indicated by the C LED () and the Internal LED (). With S49 the Internal/External key () can be set out of function and can block in the positions Internal or External (see chapter.5., figure -7, page 8). The factory setting is S49 = only Internal. With S4 the CB signal can be set to Lo or Hi or a digital input assigned, (see chapter.5., figure -6, page 7). The factory setting is S4 = -, CB =. 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

43 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) The setpoint switching can be varied freely with these structuring possibilities: Switching to Int S49 CB S4 active active Dependence on setpoint w setpoint w S=,4,5,6,7,8 S=/ Int and CB to 4 wi (SH) or w E wi or wi only Int - wi or we wi or wi only CB to 4 wi (SH) or w E wi or wi only external no - w E wi only internal Switching any any wi wi Table - Possibilities of setpoint switching depending on S4 and S49 Actual value and setpoint display A red and a green analog display with.7% resolution and a red and a green 4 / digit digital display are arranged on the front panel. The green displays are assigned to the setpoint, the red displays to the actual value. In addition there is a -digit yellow digital display for the y-display. The corresponding adjustment keys and status-led s are assigned in color and position to the displays. The two analog displays always indicate the active actual value. The difference between the two displays is the control difference xd or the control error xw = xd. The digital actual value display also indicates the current actual value except in the ratio controllers (ratio controller: actual ratio). The digital setpoint display indicates the setpoint before the setpoint ramp except in ratio controllers (ratio controller: nominal ratio before the setpoint ramp). Depending on the controller type the displays, the Internal/External-key () and the Δw-adjustment keys (6) are switched by the Shift key () controller I/controller II. The following symbols are used in the block diagrams below to simplify the representation: d * I I x Adjustable display range (digital displays only) Parameter set dp, da, de, I or II for setting the display format Display level I or II, no identification means only level or both levels the same Displayed variables x, w, xv or wv Display type Digital display Analog display Digital and analog display SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 4

44 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Display range The digital displays are four-digit 7-segment displays, the display range of which can be set in double controllers and process displays (S>4) for the x- and w-display together, for the two display levels I and II separately, with the parameter dp (decimal point), da (start value) and de (full scale) in the structuring mode ofpa. In single controllers (S 4) the parameters of the display level II arefolloweduptothe parameters of the display level I and are not adjustable. With dai or daii the numeric value is set which is to be displayed at arithmetic value (corresponding to % display in the analog displays). With dei or deii the numeric value is set which is to be displayed at arithmetic value (corresponding to % display in the analog displays). With dpi or dpii the decimal point is set as a fixed point. If the starting point is set less than the full scale, a rising display is given with increasing arithmetic values and vice versa. The numeric range for the start and end values goes from -999 to 9999, beyond these numbers -ofl and ofl is displayed in the case of overmodulation in the process operation level. The factory setting is. to. %. With the refresh rate parameter dr (onpa) the digital displays can be calmed down in the case of restless process variables. Non-linear process variables can be represented physically correctly by the linearization. The display range set with dp, da and de is transferred depending on the controller type (S) to the parameters and setpoints which can be assigned to the displayed variable: S Display format accordingly Parameter range -. to -. to SA, SE, referenced to Sb wi/wii wiii.. SH de*-da* = % d*i # # d*i % d*ii % d*i d*i d*i d*i d*i d*i d*i # # d*i % d*i % d*ii d*ii d*ii d*ii d*i # # # d*i d*ii d*ii d*i d*i d*i d*i d*i d*ii d*ii d*i # # # # # # # d*i d*i d*i d*i d*ii d*ii d*ii -%to% # # -%to% to 99.9 % -%to% to 99.9 % -%to% # -%to% -%to% Table - Display format of parameters and setpoints assigned to the displays With the appropriate asisgnment, this also applies to the limit value alarms A to A4, see chapter.5.9, page 4. The analog displays have a fixed display range of to %. The overshoot or undershoot is displayed by the flashing % or %-LED. Display is by one or two alternately flashing LEDs. The center of the illumination field represents the pointer. This display technique doubles the resolution. If a falling characteristic is set for the digital displays (d*e<d*a), the analog displays are switched in direction of effect except for the ratio controllers. 44 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

45 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Setting of the linearizer at S4 = Set start and end of measuring with da* and de* and the decimal point dp* in the structuring mode ofpa for the display. Divide measuring range U A to U E including % overflow in % sections and determine partial voltages. U U n = E -U A nu A with n = - to h Determine the respective physical value from the appropriate function tables for every Un or graphically from the corresponding curve (interpolate if necessary) and enter the value for the respective vertex value (-* to *) in physical variables in the structuring mode ofpa. U [mv] E 6 U E % n Un [mv] Vertex t [_C] value 5.7! *,48 5 U E =48, mv 48.! *, ! 9 * ! 8 * ! 7 * ! 6 * ! 5 * ! 4 * ! * 59.4! * ! * 4 U A =4, mv 4.! * ! - * t A ,, t E t[_c] da * de * Figure -9 Example of linearization of a thermocouple type B PtRh/Pt6, measuring range to _C SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

46 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Setting the function transmitter for linearizing at S4 = Vertex values x [%] E x Phys. A w e Int Int D d** x w to w A x D x x (l) xd W i y ,,4,6,8 [%] x Phys. C Measuring range to 6 C Figure - Using the function transmitter to linearize non-linear process variables for the display and control Figure - Sensor function, e.g. from table The vertex values of the function transmitters are given in % and not physically here because of their free utilization. Setting takes place in the structure mode ofpa in the range from 99.9 to 99.9 %. The vertex values and are set with % or % so that x (l) is available again as a standard variable and the reference junction terminals for determining the display range of the digital display are correct. The display range is set with the parameters da*, de* and dp* according to the physical measuring range. To determine the vertex values, apply the sensor function as shown in fig. - and divide the range into % steps (x phys in %). Then read off the % values in the vertex positions toonthex phys -axis and enter one after the other in the structuring mode ofpa. x (l) [%] x (l) [%] x [%] Vertex values 6,4,6,8 x Phys C Figure - Linearization function Figure - Linearized controlled variable x(l) 46 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

47 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Function inputs FE to FE S Fixed setpoint controller independent setpoints Fixed setpoint controller dependent setpoints DDC fixed setpoint controller Follow-up, synchronized, SPC controller x FE (linearizable) main controlled variable 4 Ratio controller x commanded process variable 5 Cascade control xii main controlled variable master controller 6 Ratio cascade control xii main controlled variable master controller 7/8 Override control xi main controlled variable main controller x FE auxiliary controlled variable x FE (linearizable) auxiliary controlled variable w E external command variable x commanded process variable xii auxiliary control variable master controller xi commanding process variable slave controller xi auxiliary controlled variable Main controller wv E external command variable for ratio factor xi controlled variable slave controller xi commanded process variable slave controller xii controlled variable limiting controller 9 Process display xi process variable xii process variable Fixed setpoint controller (control system coupling) x main controlled variable x auxiliary controlled variable x auxiliary controlled variable Follow-up controller (control system coupling) x main controlled variable w E external command variable Double controller xi main controlled variable w EA I external setpoint xii main controlled variable Table -4 Control technical function of the inputs FE to FE Function inputs FE4 to FE have the following control-technical function: FE4 disturbance variable connection (z) for the D-element or for the manipulated variable y (selection by S55) FE5 Follow-up input (y N ) for the manipulated variable followup in K-controllers (S = ) and in S-controllers with external follow-up (S = ) FE6 Manipulated variable feedback supply (y R ) for the y display in S-controllers with internal feedback (S = ) or the manipulated variable feedback input (y R ) in S-controllers with external feedback (S = ); Process display (S = 9) with XIII FE7 Manipulated variable connection (z) selection S57 FE8 External setpoint w E II FE9 Follow-up input y N II FE Manipulated variable feedback supply y R II FE manipulated variable connection setpoint The function inputs FE to FE have different control-technical functions depending on the controller type (S). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

48 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual.5.4. S = : Fixed setpoint controller with independent setpoints W x wi INT CB yh ts y FE FE FE wi x x x x = xc (x-c xc) W x P I D ya yac6 z FE4 z Figure -4 Principle representation S = This controller type can be used as a fixed setpoint controller with independent setpoints (two batch mode) or as a fixed setpoint controller with setpoint, by blocking the Internal/External switching (factory setting). By linking the inputs x, x, x with the constants c, c, c, it can be used as a three-component controller. Switching between the two internal setpoints which are adjustable on the front separately as one, two or three component takes place depending on the control signals Int and CB according to table -5. Signaling of the active setpoint takes place on the LEDs Internal and C. As soon as a LED lights, wi is active. Control commands Message signals Digital Effective w Digital inputs Front Front LED outputs at S5= Explanations H N Si CB internal internal C RB RC wi wi (n) ) switching switching wi wi (n) mit CB, Int= with Int,CB= ) wi wi (n) wi wi (n) wi x switching switching wi x with CB,Int= with Int,CB= ) wi x wi x ) follow up takes place at S5 = and S5 = to the controlled variable x, followup does not apply for the switching wi/wi at S5 = automatic mode starts with wi=x (xd=), the active setpoint runs to the old set value via the possibly set setpoint ramp ts ) factory setting, fixed setpoint controller with setpoint (S49 = : only Internal, Int =, S4 = -: CB = ) RB = Int RC =Int CB = Int CB Table -5 Switching between wi and wi 48 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

49 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) With the Shift key () the digital w display can be switched in the display level II to the inactive setpoint and the digital x display to the main controlled variable x (display range I must be set, display range II is automatically set the same). The active setpoint and the active actual value x are still shown on the analog displays. Selection by Shift key effective wi ) LED controller I LED controller II displayed w ) displayed x digital analog digital analog I II I II wi wi wi wi.5 ).5 ) wi 4) wi wi wi III 5) wi or wi wi wi x x ) via CB and Int accordingly 5 ) only if there is no x-tracking ).5 = flashing rhythm : 4) = adjustable 5) only at C8 wi wi wi wi x x x x x x x x Table -6 Switching the display levels The setpoint displayed with the digital w-displays can also be set with the Δw-adjustment keys (6./6. Fig. -, p. 68). The LEDs Controller I/ Controller II signal the display level. Flashing light signals that the displayed setpoint is not identical with the active setpoint. Steady light signals that the displayed and active setpoints are identical. If switching between wi and wi is blocked via S49 (Int) and S4 (CB), switching of the digital w display to the display level II is omitted. Only the digital x-display is switched over. Signaling of the display level II is with a steady light. With the constants c8 and c9 a disturbance variable connection of FE can be made in the setpoint branch. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

50 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Int CB S5 wic8 (w ST c9) d * I d * I d * I wi ES wi n o / S //4/5 Int CB Int CB II w=wic8 (w ST c9) W I A SA,SE III ts wi / wi n o S wi ES //4/5 A A=H N Si H=Hi He SES see Fig. -5, page 4 FE FE FE FE w ST x x x c, c, c factory setting c=c=c= tfi S5 x =xc (x-c xc) x x d * I II W d * I xi I x xdi xi see Fig. -5, page 9 Adaptation Figure -5 Block diagram S =, fixed setpoint controller with independent setpoints 5 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

51 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5).5.4. S= : Fixed setpoint controller with dependent setpoints W x wi INT CB y H ts y wi=wi c4c5 x FE x FE x FE x=xc (x - c xc) W x P I D y a y a c6 z FE4 z Figure -6 Principle representation S = This controller type is always used when for example in two batch mode the second setpoint needs to be in a specific ratio to the first. The ratio is set by the constants c4 and c5. Factory setting is c4 = and c5 =. The switching and display functions are the same as at S =. Only the internal setpoint (wi) can be adjusted if it is displayed. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

52 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Int CB w-c5 c4 S5 d * I d * I wi ES / wi n o //4/5 S c4, c5 wi c4c5 wi wi Int CB Int CB II A A w SA,SE I A=H N Si H=Hi He ts wi SES FE FE FE factory setting c4=, c5= x x x c, c, c x=xc (x-c xc) S5 x W xi xdi xi see Fig. -5, pg. 9 see Fig. -5, page 4 factory setting c=c=c= tfi Adaptation x d * I II d * I I x Figure -7 Block diagram S =, fixed setpoint controller with dependent setpoints S = : DDC fixed setpoint controller The DDC controller has the job of taking over the control circuit as bumpless as possible in the case of a computer failure. During the DDC operation the process computer takes over the control function, the controller is on standby, i.e. it is followed up to the computer manipulated variable; the control difference is reset to zero for absolutely bumpless switching by x-tracking if necessary. In K-controller circuits, the actuating current can be output parallel by the computer periphery to achieve full redundancy. In this case the actuating current of the K-controller is switched off during computer operation (S66 = ). If the actuating current of the computer is also to be switched off during controller operation, the two currents simply need to be added by OR diodes. This OR diode is integrated in the current outputs of the SIPART controllers. If the UI-converter of the K-controller is to be used during computer operation to feed the final control element, the actuating current cutoff must be canceled (S66 = ). The DDC mode corresponds to follow-up mode of the other controller types with the difference that the switching to follow-up mode takes place not via the control signal N but as a function of 5 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

53 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) the control signal CB and the Internal/External key: DDC operation RC=Int CB = w x wi x-tracking y H ts W FE FE FE x x x x=xc (x-c xc) x P I D y a y a c6 z y N Y INT CB FE4 z YES FE5 y N SES Figure -8 Principle representation S = The DDC mode is signaled like the follow-up mode in the other controller types by the lit y-external LED. The status of the control signal CB and the Internal/External key is displayed by the LEDs C and Internal. During the DDC mode the setpoint is prepared by follow-up to the computer failure. The setpoint is always displayed which would become active after the computer failure. With S5 a choice is made between x-tracking and wi, with S5 the safety setpoint is preset. With S6 the priority between DDC-mode and manual mode is determined. If DDC-mode has priority over manual mode, you can select with the manual-automatic switching whether operation is to continue after a computer failure in automatic or manual mode. If manual intervention is necessary in computer operation, switching to Internal operation is necessary in addition to switching to manual operation; the LEDs Internal () and Manual (8) light, the LED y-external () goes out, the dark LED C () stil indicates computer standby. If manual mode has priority over DDC-mode you can switch directly from computer operation to manual operation. Then the manual LED (8) lights, the y-external LED () goes out, the dark LEDs Internal () and C () still indicate computer standby of the controller or computer standby. Automatic mode is always switched to here in the event of a computer failure. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

54 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Table -7 DDC controller, S =, DDC operation has priority over manual operation S6 = 54 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

55 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Table -8 DDC controller, S =, manual operation has priority over DDC operation S6 = SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

56 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual ) manual operation can be achieved by Control signals Message signals digital input He Front Hi Front manual LED digital output H.9 6) Table -9 Generation of the control signal H = Hi He ) In DDC mode the actuating current of the controller is switched off at S66 =. The source for y E at S6=isy N (FE5)oratS6=y NΔ ( Δy), if S <. At S= y ES is active (SES). The external manipulated variable is followed up which is fed in via Δy(y NΔ ) and via the SES (y ES ). When feeding in via FE5 (y N ) the feeding controller must be followed up. ) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement, S47 =. 4) By OR linking of the digital output H with the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation can be signaled in manual or safety mode. 5).5 = Flashing rhythm : 6),9 = Flashing rhythm. off,.9 on ( ) = adjustable (n) = is followed up to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching. The control signal Follow up (N) has no function in DDC controllers. The tables apply for S5 = (with follow up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint). At S5 = (without follow-up) and x-tracking automatic operation starts with wi = x (xd = ), the active setpoint runs to the old set value wi via the possibly set setpoint ramp ts. With the Shift key () the digital x display can be switched to the main controlled variable x in the display level II. Signaling of the display levels takes place via the LEDs Control I/Control II by a steady light. 56 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

57 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) see fig. -5, page 9 wi c, c, c S5 Factory setting c=c=c= wi S5 H S5 X H H S6 SH Si CB SA,SE Int ts <> wi ES H H H=Hi He Si Si CB Int S5 II d*i d*i I x x d*i I x w w // S 4/5 x x=xc (x-c xc) w I tf Adaptation x x xdi x SES FE FE FE xi see fig. -5, page 4 Figure -9 Block diagram S =, DDC fixed setpoint controller SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

58 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual S = : Follow-up controller, synchronized controller, SPC-controller wi wi w x y H SES w ES ts y Δw FE w EA we w SL we =c4 w E c5 w E INT CB w x P I D y a y a c6 z FE FE x x x=xc xc x FE4 z Figure - Principle representation S = In this controller type you can switch between the internal setpoint wi and the external setpoint w E depending on the control signals CB and the Internal-/External key () (see table, page 6 and table, page 6). The external setpoint can be preset via the analog output FE (w EA ) or via the digital signals Δw as an incremental setpoint (w EΔ ) (selection via S5) or via the SES (w ES ) (selection by S). The active setpoint w can be fed back by an appropriately assigned analog output to the feeding controller for follow up when using wea or for displaying when using weδ. This controller type is used for cascade controls with separate controllers (master and follow-up controllers), for synchronized controls, fixed setpoint controls with external setpoint preset (e.g. under console conditions via the incremental Δw-inputs) and SPC-controls (setpoint control). This controller type attains special importance when coupled with the SIPART software for operation and monitoring. Here this controller type is used for fixed setpoint control with external setpoint preset (w ES ) and Automatic/Manual switching via the follow-up signal N ES and the input y ES (see chapter.5.6, page 99). SPC controls Here a process computer takes over the setpoint command during computer operation RC = Int CB =, in the event of a computer failure (CB from! ) the controller takes over either the last computer setpoint (followed up wi) or the safety setpoint SH (selection via S5). 58 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

59 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Cascade control A command controller, e.g. a fixed setpoint controller (with the main controlled variable) feeds the external setpoint of a slave controller with its manipulated variable (with the auxiliary controlled variable, disturbance variable) and this the actuator. This gives faster control of the main controlled variable in the event of changes in the auxiliary controlled variable, e.g. furnace temperature control (furnace temperature, main controlled variable) with different flow of the medium to be heated (auxiliary controlled variable). Synchronized controls A master controller feeds several synchronized controllers simultaneously whose individual setpoints can be set in a ratio to each other by the constants c4 and c5 and then drag the controlled variables accordingly (controlled variable synchronization). Internal/External switching The setpoint switching takes place via a logic link RC = Int CB and its negation (see table, page 6 and table, page 6). Both control signals can be set statically to or (int via S49, CB via S4) in addition to their normal functions as Shift key or control signal with the states and, see chapter.5. fig. -6, page 7 and fig. -7, page 8. The factory setting is Int = (S49 = ) and CB= (S4 = -), so that in the factory setting the internal setpoint wi is always active and cannot be switched! With this setting facility it is possible to perform the switching only dependent on Int (S49=, S4= -) or only dependent on CB (S49=, S4= to 4) as a slave controller with Internal/ External-switching. If the switching facility is blocked in External position (S49=, S4=-), the controller operates as a follow-up controller without Internal/External-switching (see table -, page 4). Display of the external setpoint w E With the Shift key () the digital w-display can be switched to the external setpoint we and the digital x-display to the main controlled variable x in the display level II (display range I must be set, display range II is automatically set the same). The active setpoint and the active actual value are still indicated on the analog displays. The LEDs Controller I/Controller II signal the display level. Flashing signals that the displayed external setpoint is not identical with the active setpoint. Steady light signals that the displayed and active setpoints are identical. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

60 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Selection by Shift key I II I II active w ) wi/sh wi/sh w E w E LED controller I ) via CB and Int according to table and ).5 = flashing rhythm : ) only if there is no x-tracking LED controller II.5 ) displayed w ) displayed x digital analog digital analog wi/sh w E w E w E wi/sh wi/sh w E w E x x x x x x x x Table - Switching the display level If the switching possibility between internal and external setpoint is blocked through S49 and S4, switching of the digital w-display to the display level II is no longer used. Only the digital x-display is switched. The display level II is signaled by a steady light. Operation with or setpoints If follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint is blocked with S5 =, a multiple setpoint operation (switching between wi, w E and SH is achieved (see table, page 6). Controlled variable processing A -component control is implemented (disturbance variable connection). With factors c and c the main controlled variable x can connect the auxiliary controlled variable x with weighting. 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

61 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Control signals Digital inputs H N Si CB ) Front Com- puter fail Internal Internal LED Message signals Front C LED Digital outputs RB 4) RC 4) S5= S5= S5= S5= active w at S5= S5= S5= S5= Explanations w E (n) ) w E (n) ) Automatic mode, SPC mode wi(n, ) SH ) or wi(n, ) wi(n, ) wi(n, ) wi(n, ) wi(n, ) Automatic mode, computer switched off, computer in SPC standby Automatic mode, computer on standby, controller not in SPC standby 5) Automatic mode, computer switched off, controller not in SPC standby w E (n) ) x w E (n) ) x wi (n, ) x SH ) or wi (n, ) x Manual, follow up or safety mode 5) wi (n, ) x wi (n, ) x wi (n, ) x wi (n, ) x ) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement (S47 = ). ) Source for w E ats5=isw EA (FE)oratS5=w EΔ ( Δw), when S <. At S = w ES is active (SES). The external setpoint fed in via Δw (w EΔ ) and via the SES (w ES ) is followed up. When feeding in the external setpoint via FE (w EA ) the feeding controller must be followed up. ) SH can only be reached after w E if Int = and CB goes from to (computer failure). If CB = and Int is switched from, wi is still active. Since SH is not followed up, switching over to SH can take place with the setpoint ramp ts. 4) By OR-linking with the digital outputs H, N and the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation can be signaled in manual, follow-up or safety operation. 5) Factory setting (n) followed up to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching adjustable Table - Follow-up/synchronized/SPC controller with Internal/External switching S = with follow up of the inactive setpoint SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 6

62 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Control signals Digital inputs H N Si CB ) Front Internal Internal LED Message signals Front C LED Digital outputs RB 4) RC 4) S5= S5= S5= S5= active w at S5= S5= w E ) w E ) wi( ) wi( ) wi( ) wi( ) wi, ) w E ) x w E ) x S5= S5= Explanations SH ) or wi( ) Automatic mode 5) wi( ) x SH ) or wi( ) x Manual, follow up or safety mode 5) wi( ) x wi( ) x wi( ) x wi( ) x ) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement (S47 = ). ) Source for w E ats5=isw EA (FE)oratS5=w EΔ ( Δw), when S <. At S = w ES is active (SES). The external setpoint fed in via Δw (w EΔ ) and via the SES (w ES ) is followed up. When feeding in the external setpoint via FE (w EA ) the feeding controller must be followed up. ) SH can only be reached after w E if Int = and CB goes from to (computer failure). If CB = and Int is switched from, wi is still active. Since SH is not followed up, switching over to SH can take place with the setpoint ramp ts. 4) By ORlinking with the digital outputs H, N and the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation can be signaled in manual, follow-up or safety operation. 5) Factory setting (n) followed up to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching adjustable Table - Follow-up/synchronized/SPC controller with Internal/External switching (SPC controller), S = without follow-up of the active setpoint to the active setpoint S5 =, or setpoint operation 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

63 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) see chapter.5.5, figure -5, page 9 c, c wi SES x FE FE FE w- -c5 c4 S5 / < > / FE w ES w E Δ / 4/5 Adaptation S S5 wi ) S5 SH CB CB ) w SL I c4, c5 w SL I w E =c4 wec5 w E Factory setting c4=, c5= ) factory setting Int Int wic8 (w ST c9) wc8 (w ST c9) w E c8 (w ST c9) II d*i d*i I w E w A SA,SE ts A S5 A=H N Si H=Hi He x II S wi ES / 4/5 d*i d*i w ES I ts Δw Δw w w EA w ST x Factory setting c=c=c= x tfi w w x w x x=xc xc xdi xi see chapter.5., figure -5, page 4 Figure - Block diagram S = slave controller, synchronized controller, SPC controller SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 6

64 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual S = 4: commanded ratio controller wvi wv w xv x x w SES Δw FE wv ES ts w SL wv w E SL wv EA T s Int CB x wv w=v xc5 v = va to ve v=wv (ve-va) va W X P I D y a y H yac6 z y FE x v ist = x - c5 x FE x FE4 z Figure - Principle representation S = 4 In a ratio control the commanding process variable x is evaluated with the adjustable ratio factor and a basic value c5 added if necessary and forms the setpoint w for the following controlled process variable x: w=v x c5 With xd = w - x, xd = v xc5xisgiven In the controlled status (xd = ), the following is given v= x c5 i.e. in the controlled status x and at c5 = x behaves according to the set ratio factor v. x A typical application are combustion rules where a fuel volume x beongs to every air volume x to guarantee optimum combustion. The ratio factor range v = va to ve is determined with the parameters va and ve in the structuring mode ofpa in the range from. to (factory setting va =, ve = ). In addition a basic value c5 (parameterization mode onpa) can be connected in the range from to (factory setting =.). The standardized nominal ratio wv (wvi or wv E ) in the range from to is converted to the ratio factor range. v=wv(veva)va With w=v x c5, w = wv [(ve va) va] x c5 is given. 64 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

65 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) In the ratio controller the standardized nominal ratio wv and the standardized actual ratio xv are displayed on the digital w and x displays respectively. Via d*i a physical display is possible. The controlled variable x and the evaluated commanding procesan be switched to the external nominal ratio (display level II) (display level I must be set, display level II is automatically set the same). Signaling of the display levels, see S =, fos variable w are displayed on the analog x and w displays respectively so that a direct control difference monitoring is possible at all times. With the Shift key () the digital w-display cllow-up controller. The digital x-display shows the actual ratio xv in both display levels. The actual ratio is gained by back calculating the ratio formula with the current process variables x, x: v is = xc5 x v ist = xv (ve va) va gives for xv = v isva veva or xv = xc5 -va x veva xv is displayed and is required for x-tracking mode. For the xv-display, x and x are limited to,5 % so that the display does not become too restless for small x and x or flip from positive to negative in the case of negative x. The linearizers can be used for linearization of the commanding process variable x (via FE in the freely connectable input range) and the following process variable x (via FE also in permanently connected input range). The linearization then acts on the analog displays and the ratio formation and therefore indirectly on the digital displays for nominal and actual ratio. The ratio controller has no nominal ratio limiting because the ratio factor range already marks the limit. The commanding process variable x can be limited by the freely connectable range (S4 = ) if necessary. The ratio controller behaves like slave controller S = in switching of the setpoint ratio wv so that the information and tables there apply accordingly. The variables wi and w E must be replaced by wvi and wv E. This controller type can also be used as a ratio controller with fixed ratio (manually adjustable) or with commanded ratio factor. A fixed ratio factor is used for example in simple combustion rules, (see example in figure -) where the ratio factor is reset manually if necessary for varying fuels. If it is possible to measure the effects of the ratio factor (combustion quality, pollutants in the flue gas) a commanded ratio controller is used. Here a master controller adjusts the ratio factor (ratio cascade) with the combustion quality as a control variable. Another application for ratio cascades are concentration controls, e.g. ph-value controls. The ph-value is the controlled variable of the master controller, the flow of alkali and acid the commanded process variable and the following (controlled) process variable of the ratio controller. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

66 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Example of a ratio control v c x w y x x x d K L K G Q L Q G GAS AIR Figure - Control diagram ratio control In a combustion control the air-/gas flow should be in a constant ratio. The command variable (commanding process variable) is the air flow Q L whichispresetintherangeto, m /h as a signal 4 to ma. The controlled variable (following process variable) is the gas flow Q G with a measuring range to, m /h which is also available as a 4 to ma signal. In an ideal combustion the air/gas ratio is Q L «ideal = L = 4. Q L Q G =L «λ Q The air factor λ is then and should be adjustable in the range from.75 G to.5 on the controller. The ratio factor v (bei xd = ) is determined partly by the transmission factors K of the transmitter (measuring ranges). % x =Q G K G with the values from the example K G =, m /h x =Q L K % L K L =, m /h x Q v= = G K G Q with G = x Q L L «λ v= L «λ Q L K G K L K L With the values from the example v= λ 4 % h, m, m % h gives v= λ i.e. the choice of the transmitter ranges has been made so that K G K L = L «. 66 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

67 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) The desired adjustment range of λ gives: va = = λ E.5 =.8 ve = = λ A.75 =. va and ve are set in the structuring mode ofpa. By setting the nominal ratio wv from to the ratio factor v can now be adjusted from.8 to. or the air factor λ from.5 to.75. λ v.75.8., wv Figure -4 Relationship ratio factor v and air factor λ to standardized nominal ratio wv If the combustion is also to take place at small flow volumes with excess air, the constant c must be set negative. Figure -5 shows the gas/air ratio in the controlled state at different air factors λ andc=aswellasatλ = and c <, i.e. with excess air. X X Q G ma % Gas m /h V=. λ=,75,5, V= λ= ,5, V=.8 λ=.5 ) V=, c< ) 5, , 5 4 Q L, 4, 6, 8,,, m /h air X % X ma ) constant gas/air ratio ) gas/air ratio with additional air excess Figure -5 Display of gas/air ratio in controlled status SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

68 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual see fig. -5, page 9 wv xd I x I S6=/ d*i S6=/ d*i III wv xv x w va, ve, c5 w w=v xc5 Factory setting va=, ve=, c5= wi S SH v=va to ve v=wv (ve- -va)va xv xc5 x v= / S5 / 4/5 S S5 S5 wvi A Int A S5 ) Factory setting ts x When adjusting wvi the setpoint ramp is not active <> wvi ES Δw Δw ts wv EA x / / 4/5 x wv ES tfi wv ES Adaptation III I w x wv E Δ W SL I W SL I Int ) CB CB ) wv E A=H N Si H=Hi He wv E v actual = v actual va veva d*i II SES FE FE see fig. -5, page4 FE Figure -6 Block diagram S = 4 commanded ratio controller 68 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

69 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) S = 5: Cascade control wi I SLAVE CONTROLLER = CONTROLLER I yh y wi xi wi wi wi PID I yai xi I w SL II ts ts w SL II INTII CB wii wiι w E Δ x II = x II c x II c SES ±Δw FE8 FE FE FE FE4 wiii xii xii xi wii PID xii wii INTI yii=w E I xiι xii z yaic6 z MASTER CONTROLLER = CONTROLLER II Figure -7 Principle representation S = 5 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

70 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual In this controller type a master controller (Controller II) and a follow-up controller (Controller I) are interconnected in one controller in a cascade (application, see S = ). Master controller (controller II) With respect to the setpoint switching the master controller has approximately the same structure as the follow-up controller S =. It is therefore a fixed setpoint controller with the possibility of external setpoint preset via analog signal, the serial interface or as an incremental setpoint via the control signals Δw. Selection is made with w SL II and S. In computer coupling it is also possible here, in the case of a computer failure (CB from! ) to continue working with the last computer setpoint (followed-up wi) or with the safety setpoint SH (selection by S5). The master controller cannot be switched to manual operation but the slave controller can be switched to the internal setpoint. Follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint can be switched off with S5 =. Follow-up controller (controller I) The follow-up controller can be switched for disconnecting the cascade for startup procedures via the Internal/External key () (Int I) between the internal setpoint wii and the external setpoint wei which is equal to the manipulated variable of the master controller (yaii). The internal operation of the follow-up controller corresponds to manual operation of the master controller. Setpoint limiting of the follow-up controller can be implemented by the y-limiting of the master controller. The follow-up of the master controller in internal operation of the follow-up controller and x-tracking (A) and the follow-up of the internal setpoint of the follow-up controller in external operation and x-tracking (A) always takes place so that the switching Internal/External is bumpless. Display and operating level switching With the Shift key () the digital and analog x- and w-displays and the function of the Internal/External key () including the Internal LED () and the Δw-adjustment keys (6) are switched to the selected controller. The y-display (4), the Manual/Automatic key (9) and the Δy-adjustment keys () are permanently assigned to the follow-up controller. 7 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

71 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) The LED s Controller I/Controller II signal the display and operating level: Selection by Controll. II Controll. I LED LED LED LED displayed adjustable Shift key Master Slave C Internal Controll. IControll. II is wi controller controller Controll. Int Int according II wi II ) Controller II Ext Int to CB.5 II Master contr. Int Ext.5 ) II wi II ) Ext Ext C=CB II Int Int I wi I ) Controller I Ext Int.5 I wi I ) Slave contr. Int Ext.5 ) I Ext Ext I ) only if there is no x-tracking ).5 = flashing rhythm : Table - Switching the display levels Flashing light signals that the status displayed by the Internal LED is identical with that in the unselected controller. Steady light signals that the status displayed by the Internal LED is not identical with that in the selected controller. Normally the display level switch will be in the position Controller II (master controller) so that the main controller variable xii can be monitored. The display level I is only used for startup procedures. The Automatic/Manual switch for the slave controller is possible in both display levels, depending on the selection of the display level the main controlled variable xii or the auxiliary controlled variable xi can be monitored. The display range of the digital x and w display can be adjusted separately for both controllers by the parameters d*i and d*ii if necessary in connection with the linearizers so that both controllers can be displayed physically correctly. x-tracking With S5 =, x-tracking is selected for both controllers together (S5). The slave controller follows up the internal setpoint or the controller output to the auxiliary controlled variable xi in A-operation. The master controller triggers this function in A-operation or Internal of the follow-up controller (Int I corresponds like A to disconnected cascade). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

72 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual At S5= (without follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint) the (n) is omitted at wii. If x-tracking is switched on (S5=) automatic operation of the master controller begins with w=x (xd=), via the set setpoint ramp ts, the active setpoint runs to the old set value of w. ) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement (S47=). ) Source for w E IΙ at S< ist w E Δ (±Δw), at S= w ES via the SES. ) SH can only be reached after w E Δ,ifIntII= and CB go from to (computer failure). If CB= and Int is switched from to, wiiι is still active. Since SH is not followed up, you can switch to SH with the setpoint ramp ts. 4) By OR-linking with the digital outputs H, N, IntI and the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation can be signaled at disconnected cascade. 5) When selecting controller I is C LED = 6) Manual operation or operation with external manipulated variable is always possible irrespective of the selection Controller I/ControllerΙI. 7) Switching only possible in the respective selected controller. Operating states are retained. (n) followed up to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching adjustable Table -4 Cascade control S = 5 with follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint S5= 7 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

73 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Controller I, see figure -5, page 9 <> A IntI S5 I wii / ts S5 // S 4/5 wii ES yn ya II I S5 <> wiii S5 IntII A IntI II d*ii d*ii xii wii wii Follow-up controller Master controller A=H N Si H=Hi He IntI ) wii wii wi A A IntI xdii I yaii=w E I PID controller II xii xii wi xi Controller II see Fig. -5, page 9, Control parameter II vv,cp,tn,y o, tv, AH, YA, YE SH / IntII ) CB wiii ES II xii CB xdi xi Adaptation S / 4/5 SES w SL II / S w ES w E II w SL II / 4/5 ts Δw Δw FE8 c,c xιi FE xii=xiic xiic xii FE Factory setting c=c= see fig. -5, page 4 xi FE tfii Adaptation ) Factory setting Figure -8 Block diagram S = 5 cascade control SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

74 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual S = 6: Ratio-cascade control yh Follow-up controller = Controller I wi I wv xv x I wi y wi=v xc5 IntI wi v=va to ve v=wv(vave)va PID I PID x I Master controller = Controller II w SL II ts wii IntII CB wii w SL II I xii xi xi x II z wiii ts w ES w E Δ yai yai=c6 z v is = xic5 xi SES wii xii wii Δw l FE8 FE FE FE FE4 Figure -9 Principle representation S = 6 74 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

75 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) In this controller type a master controller (Controller II) and a follow-up controller as a commanded ratio controller (Controller I) are interconnected in a ratio cascade. (Applications see S = 4) Master controller The master controller has the same structure with respect to the setpoint switching as the follow-up controller S =. It is therefore a fixed setpoint controller with the possibility of external setpoint preset via the analog signal, the serial interface or as an incremental setpoint via the control signals Δw. Selection is made with w SL II and S. In computer coupling it is also possible here, in the case of a computer failure (CB from! ) to continue working with the last computer setpoint (followed-up wi) or with the safety setpoint SH (selection by S5). The master controller cannot be switched to manual operation but the follow-up controller can be switched to the internal setpoint. x-tracking in A-operation is possible by selection with S5 =. The follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint can be switched off by S5 =. Follow-up controller The follow-up controller is a ratio controller as described under S = 4. To disconnect the cascade the Internal/External key () (Int I) can be used to switch between the internal ratio factor wvi and the external ratio factor wv E, which is equal to the manipulated variable of the master controller (yaii). The internal operation of the follow-up controller corresponds to manual operation of the master controller. xv-tracking is possible in A-operation by selection with S5 =. Setpoint limitings can be performed via limiting of the manipulated variable of the master controller and possibly by limiting the commanding process variable x I in the freely connectable input range (S4 = ). The follow-up of the master controller and xv-tracking in A-operation and the follow-up of the internal ratio factor wvi in external operation and in x-tracking (A) always takes place so that switching is bumpless. Table -4, page 7 and the statements on x-tracking of the cascade controls apply accordingly when wi is replaced by wvi and w E by wv E. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

76 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Controller I, see figure -5, page 9 xdi xi Adaptation S6=/ A=H N Si H=Hi He III III Follow-up controller Master controller S5 w x d*ii II d*i I S6=/ d*i II SA, SE ts IntII ) A IntI S5 xv wv wii IntII CB SH <> wvi A IntI va, ve, c5 IntI ) CB ) A S5 wi A IntI / wi=v xc5 S5 wvi ES // S 4/5 w E II w SL II S / w SL II / 4/5 d*ii xdii II yn A=H N Si H=Hi He I II ya xii PID controller II xii xii wii wi yaii=wv E I xi xi v is = xic5 xi xi tfii tfi xv= v istva veva Adaptation Factory setting va=, ve=, c5= Controller II see Fig. -5, page 9, Control parameter II vv,cp,tn,y o, tv, AH, YA, YE v=va to ve v=wv (veva)va wiii <> / wiii ES / 4/5 S SES w ES ts Δw Δw FE8 xii FE xi FE see fig. -5, page 4 xi FE ) Factory setting Figure -4 Block diagram S = 6 ratio cascade control 76 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

77 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) S = 7/8: Override control wi wi xi wi y H SES ts w ES w SL I INT CB ts wi Main controller y Δw FE8 xi FE xi FE xii FE Sb w SL I w EΔ xi=xic xic xi xii wii Min selection Max PID-controller I YA YE YE YA PID-controller II yaii yai wii xii wii Limiting controller Figure -4 Principle representation S = 7/8 In the override control (limiting control, disconnecting control) two controllers are connected parallel, the main controller (Controller I) and the limiting controller (Controller II) which act on a common actuator. The manipulated variables of both controllers are mutually limited by the in this case controlled parameters YA (S=7) or YE (S=8). This gives a controlled variable limiting related to the setpoint set or active in both controllers. One of the two controllers preferably the main controller is always intervening and controls the process. The non-intervening controller then has a control difference which controls it to the limited manipulated variable. In this case all further integration is prevented so that no integral saturation takes place. Disconnection always takes place at the latest when the control diffrence in the non-intervening controller reverses. Changes in the controlled variable in the direction of the control difference reversal also lead to disconnection via the P-part (possibly also D-part). This gives a particularly good dynamic behavior. By the arrangement of two controllers, better adaptation to the different time behaviors of the two controlled systems is achieved than with a Minimum- or Maximum selection of the control differences. The possible implementation by Minimum or Maximum selection of the manipulated variables can lead to dynamic problems due to integral saturation of the non-intervening controller. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

78 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual - Example: Core temperature control with maximum casing temperature limiting The core temperature of a reactor is to be controlled without the cooled casing of the reactor exceeding a specific temperature (limiting setpoint Sb). In error-free operation the main controller (Controller I) controls the core temperature to the set setpoint w core. Since the casing temperature is below the critical limiting setpoint Sb, the limiting controller (Controller II) has a positive control difference. The manipulated variable of the main controller is fed increased by % to the limiting controller as a maximum limiting variable and forms its maximum manipulated variable. The limiting controller is driven to this limit by the positive control difference. Its manipulated variable is also fed to the main controller as a maximum manipulated variable limit but remains ineffective because it is an increase of % above the manipulated variable of the main controller. In this situation the main controller can set its manipulated variable totally independently of the limiting controller and control the core temperature of the reactor. Sb=w case x case YE Controller II Casing temperature controller (Limiting controller) w core x core Controller I YE y S=8 Core temperature controller (Main controller) Figure -4 Core temperature control with max. casing temperature limiting If the casing temperature rises above the set limiting value Sb, e.g. due to failure of the cooling water, the limiting controller gets a negative control difference. As a result its manipulated variable is released from the forced limit and the heating performance is reduced. The limiting controller then forces the reduced manipulated variable on the main controller as a maximum manipulated variable limit. Due to the reduced heating performance the main controller receives a positive control difference which drives it to the manipulated variable limit. Now the limiting controller controls the process to constant casing temperature. When the cooling is reinstated, the casing temperature drops. The limiting controller will now increase the heating performance and maintain the casing temperature. With increasing heating performance the core temperature also increases and the control difference of the main controller becomes negative. 78 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

79 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) As a result the main controller controls down its manipulated variable and with it the heating performance and imposes the manipulated variable limit on the main controller. The case temperature drops below the limiting setpoint and the limiting controller drives to the manipulated variable limit via the now positive control difference. It is controlled to a constant core temperature. The disconnection therefore always takes place when the controlled variable of the non-intervening controller becomes more positive than the set setpoint (xd negative), then the manipulated variable limited to maximum is dropped below, i.e. a maximum value limiting of the controlled variables takes place. The manipulated variable maximum value limiting corresponds in this example to a minimum value selection of the manipulated variables. Depending on the structure switch position (S = 7 or 8) and the set controller direction of effect (normal: Kp or reversed: -Kp) the limiting direction of the controlled variables is reversed (Minimum- or Maximum value limits): S Manipulated variable limiting direction corresponds to y- selection Controller direction of effect Main controller I Limit ing controller II Main controller I Disconnection at Limiting controller II Limiting of the controlled variables to 7 ya Max norm Kp norm Kp xdi >, xi< wi xdii >, xii <Sb Min Min 7 ya Max rev -Kp rev -Kp xdi <, xi >wi xdii <, xii >Sb Max Max 8 ye Min norm Kp norm Kp xdi <, xi >wi xdii <, xii >Sb Max Max 8 ye Min rev -Kp rev -Kp xdi >, xi <wi xdii >, xii <Sb Min Min 7 ya Max norm Kp rev -Kp xdi >, xi <wi xdii <, xii >Sb Min Max 7 ya Max rev -Kp norm Kp xdi <, xi >wi xdii >, xii <Sb Max Min 8 ye Min norm Kp rev -Kp xdi <, xi >wi xdii >, xii <Sb Max Min 8 ye Min rev -Kp norm Kp xdi >, xi <wi xdii >, xii >Sb Min Max xi xii Table -5 Limiting direction of the controlled variables depending on S = 7/8 and controller direction of effect The direction of effect of the transmitter, actuator and controlled system are included in the determining of the controller direction of effect (see chapter 4., page 5). As a rule, limiting controllers and main controllers have the same direction of effect so that the second part of the table is irrelevant. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

80 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Main controller I The main controller has the same structure with respect to the setpoint switching as the follow-up controller (S = ) with the difference that the external setpoint we cannot be preset via the analog inputs as an absolute value. It is therefore a fixed setpoint controller with the possibility of external sepoint preset via the SES or as an incremental setpoint via the control signals Δw. Selection is made by S. In computer coupling it is also possible here, in the case of a computer failure (CB from! ) to continue working with the last computer setpoint (followedup wi) or with the safety setpoint SH (selection by S5). x-tracking in A-operation is posssible by selection with S5 =. The follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint can be switched off by S5 =. Limiting controller II The limiting controller has a normal fixed setpoint structure without x-tracking and setpoint switching possibilities. The limiting setpoint Sb is set physically in the structuring mode ofpa in the range from - to % related to the display range deii -daii = %. Display and operating level switching The display and operating level switching Controller I or Controller II takes place in all operating modes with the Shift key (). The LEDs Controller I, Controller II signal which controller is displayed and which controller is intervening. The digital and analog x- and w-displays are switched. In the operating level II the Internal key () is inactive, the LED Internal () is off and the Δw adjusting keys (6) are inactive. The y-display, the Manual/Automatic key (9) and the Δy-adjusting keys () are always permanently assigned to the common controller output and active in both display levels. Selection by Shift key active controller LED controller I LED controller II displayed is adjustable setpoint Main controller I Limiting controller II Main controller I Limiting controller II Main controller I Main controller I Limiting controller II Limiting controller II.5 ).5 ) I II I II wi ) wi ) ) only if there is no x-tracking ).5 flashing rhythm : adjustable Table -6 Display level switching Flashing of the Controller I/Controller II-LEDs signals that the displayed controller is not identical with the active controller. Steady light signals that the displayed controller is not identical with the active controller. 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

81 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) The process can be monitored at any time by manual switching. As a rule the display level switch is in position I (main controller) so that the main controller variable xi canbemonitored. Flashing of the Controller LED I signals that the limiting setpoint has been reached and requests switching to the display level II (limiting controller) with the controlled variable of the limiting controller. The display range must be set separately for the digital x and w display for both controllers with the parameters d*i and d*ii if necessary in connection with the linearizers so that both controllers can be displayed correctly. Automatic/Manual switching Since both controllers only generate one common automatic manipulated variable y a,the Automatic/Manual switching of both controllers is also common. In manual-, follow-up-, safety- or blocking operation, both controllers are followed up to the active y. The manipulated variable limit which is only active in automatic operation via the parameters YAI and YEI represents an absolute manipulated variable limit in automatic operation. The mutual follow-up of YA or YE can only take place up to the set limits. By setting YAI and YEI, YAII and YEII are set to the same value automatically on leaving the parameterization mode onpa. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 8

82 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual Controller I, see figure -5, page 9 S 8 7 Limiting controller Adaptation S 8 yn 7 n l n l S5 SH S / S Sb Sb d*ii d*ii / 4/5 ts SA,SE ts A c, c I c x I=x Ic x I xi Main controller FE xi xi z S5 Factory setting c=c= tfi Adaptation xi wii <> wii ES Δw Δw w SL I w SL I xii II II d*i I Int ) CB Int A CB ) S5 A=H N Si H=Hi He d*i I ye ya PID controller II see chapter.5.5, Figure -5, Page 9 yn ya ye ya PID controller I see chapter.5.5, Figure -5, Page 9 yn ya ya wi w ES ) Factory setting wii wii xd*ii FE8 FE FE / / 4/5 SES xii tfii xdi xi z see fig. -5, page 4 FE4 Figure -4 Block diagram S = 7/8, Override control 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

83 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5).5.4. S = 9: Process display d*ii FE xii gn (w) d*i FE xi rt (x) FE6 xiii off,, S67 S68 ge (y) Figure -44 Block diagram, process display The process display provides the possibility of displaying three process variables (xi to xiii). The process variables xi and xii are indicated on the x- and w-display whereby the digital and analog displays are connected in parallel. With the parameters d*i and d*ii, if necessary in connection with the linearizers, both process variables can be displayed separately physically correctly. The switching possibility of the display level is disabled. The LEDs Controller I/Controller II are dark. The process variable xiii is indicated by the y-display and can be switched off by the structure switch S67 in the off position. The display range here is to %, according to the position of S68 mit rising or falling characteristic. The display overrun is - to %. Alarm messages are possible by assigning the limit value alarms A to A4 to FE, FE or FE6 (see chapter.5.9, page 4). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 8

84 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual.5.4. S = : Fixed setpoint controller with setpoint (control system coupling) S5 wic8(w ST c9) wi n o Int CB w=wic8 (w ST c9) w A d * I II w SA,SE d * I I ts // /4 / S64 wi ES S //4/5 A A =H N Si H=Hi He SES w ST S5 x w xdi FE FE FE FE x x x c, c, c x=xc (x-c xc) factory setting c=c=c= tfi x d * I d * I xi I x xi see Fig. -5, page 9 Adaptation Note: S64 = is recommended for this controller type Figure -45 Block diagram S =, fixed setpoint controller for control system coupling This fixed setpoint controller is designed specially for coupling to the control system. The control interventions by the signals Int and CB which cannot be used otherwise in this controller type are available for locking the control system operation via the SES. With Int CB the setpoint signal wi ES is separated and the manual intervention via He ES at S64 = suppressed. S64 = is expressly recommended for this connection. The other connection of the input function is almost identical with the structure S =. 84 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

85 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5).5.4. S = : Follow-up controller without Int/Ext switching (control system coupling) This follow-up controller is designed specially for the control system coupling. It differs from the structures=inthatthesetpointswitchingtow i via Int and CB is omitted and thus these control signals are available for locking the control system operation via the SES. With Int CB the manual intervention via He ES at S64 = is suppressed. S64 = is expressly recommended for this connection. Disconnection of a cascade control is made by manual manipulation at the master controller. The other functions are unchanged in relation to S =. see fig. -5, page 9 S5 x=xc xc Δw Δw w EA x x ts S5 d*i I/II w-c5 c4 c, c w E SA,SE c4. c5 w E =c4 w E c5 Factory setting c4=, c5= w E x d*i d*i I/II I/II w SL I w E Δ w SL x x tfi ) Factory setting w ts w w Adaptation w x xdi Factory setting c=c= xi FE FE FE Figure -46 see fig. -5, page 4 Block diagram S= Follow-up controller for control system coupling SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

86 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual.5.4. S=: Double fixed setpoint/follow-up controller At S=, independently operating controllers with fixed setpoint/follow-up controller function are available. With the Shift key the operating and display levels are switched completely between the two controllers. Controller wii wii wi xi SES w es I w SL I w E I INT CB(I) ts w y H yi FE w EA I w SL I x P I D y a c6 z FE FE4 xi z x Controller wiii wiii wii xii SES w es II w SL II w E II INT CB(II) ts w y H yii FE8 w EA II w SL II x P I D y a c7 z FE FE7 xii z x Figure -47 Principle representation S = double controller 86 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

87 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) see fig. -5, page 9 S5 S5 CB CB ) w SL I w E tfi Adaptation wii Int Int A A S5 di I w SA,SE ts wii w SL I x A=H N Si H=Hi He x w d*i I x w x xdi xi <> // S 4/5 w es I w ES w EA SES wii ES FE see fig. -5, page 4 FE Figure -48 Block diagram controller I at S= SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

88 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.4 Controller types (S, S49 to S5) Manual see fig. -5, page 9 S5 wiii wiii S4 CBII CBII ) w SL II w E II tfi Adaptation IntII IntII II w wiii w SL II dii SAII,SEII tsii AII AII S A=HII NII SiII HII=HiII HeII xii wii dii I xii wii wii xii xdii xii <> SES wiii ES // S 4/5 w ES II w EA II FE8 see fig. -5, page 4 FE Figure -49 Block diagram controller II at S= 88 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

89 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation (S54 to S6).5.5. Control algorithm The PiD control algorithm of controller I and II is implemented as an interaction-free parallel structure and follows the ideal controller equations whilst neglecting the filter constants and the cycle time. P-controller ya = Kp xd = yo or ya xd = Kp Pi-controller t ya ya = Kp (xd Tn xd dt) yo(t) o r = Kp ( ) xd j Tn D-part (zd-part) The D-part can be added optionally. ya j Tv = Kp E Tv j vv The input variable E for the D-part is xd, x, -z, or z depending on the setting of S55 or S57. zy-part The z-part can be added proportionally or differentiated to the controller output ya. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

90 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation Manual p d S / y a I i see fig. -58, page to fig. -6, page n P y o =y n (Kp xdc6 zy) P tn I Pi n FE4 Controller structure I tfi S54 S54 c6 KpI vvi tv I xdi z xi / S55 zδ / zy S55 At S55=., zy= %! y o =y n p y o I c6 zy PII y n see chapter.5., figure -7, page 8 YAI, YEI see fig. -5, page 5 to fig. -49, page 88 Figure -5 Block diagram controller structure I 9 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

91 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation p d / S i see fig. -64, page 5 to fig. -68, page 9 or Fig. -8 page 7 and fig. -4, page 76 n P y o =y n II(kp xdc7 zy) y o =y n IIp y o II P S56 n Controller structure II tfii AHII z, KpII vvii tv II S56 xdii xii S57 zδ / zyii S57 At S57=., zy= %! tnii P KpII PII seefigure-7 YAII, YEII FE7 c7 c7 zyii y n y a II see fig. -5, page 5 to fig. -49, page 88 Figure -5 Block diagram controller structure II SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

92 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation Manual Controller direction of effect The controller direction of effect is set with S54 (controller I) or S56 (controller II), it must always have an opposite behavior (reverse coupling) to the controlled system (including actuator and transmitter) S54/56=, normally acting controller (Kp, rising x causes falling y) for normally acting systems (rising y causes rising x) S54/56=, reversing controller (Kp, rising x causes rising y) for reversing systems (rising y causes falling x). Operating point yo for P-controller The operating point yo of the P-controller can be set either automatically or as a parameter (onpa). Automatic operating point (Yo = Auto) Whenever there is no automatic operation (manual, follow-up, safety or blocking operation) the operating point yo is followed up so that switching to automatic operation is bumpless. This gives an automatic setting of the operating point yo in manual mode: yo = y H K p (wx H ) c6 z y II in controller II or yo = y H K p (wx H ) c6 z y in controller I If the actual value in manual mode (x H ) is driven to the desired setpoint (w) by the appropriate manual manipulated variable (y H ), the operating point (yo) is identical to the manual manipulated variable (y H ). yo = y H or yo = y H c6 z y. Set operating point (Yo = to %) The controller operates in all operating modes with the operating point set as a permanent parameter. Bumpless switching to automatic mode If there is no automatic operation (manual, follow-up, safety or active blocking operation) the I-part or the operating point yo (only at Yo = Auto) is followed up so that the switching to automatic operation is bumpless. Any still active D part is set to zero. P-PI switching With the control signal P*= the controller is switched from Pi to P-behavior, at Yo=Auto the switching is bumpless. 9 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

93 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation Manipulated variable limiting ya, ye (yaii, yeii at S=) The manipulated variable limiting with the parameters YA and YE is active in automatic operation in any case. The limits of these parameters are at and %. However, it should be taken into account that the controllers neither output negative actuating currents nor detect any negative position feedback signals. If the manipulated variable y a reaches one of the limits YA or YE in automatic mode, further integration is aborted to avoid integral saturation. This ensures that the manipulated variable can be changed immediately after reversing the polarity. In manual-, follow-up- (DDC) or safety operation the manipulated variable y can be driven out of the limiting range (only at S45= or S46=). When switching to automatic mode the last manipulated variable is transfered bumplessly, then only changes in the manipulated variable in direction of the range YA to YE are executed. In controller I the manipulated variable limiting is only possible in K-controllers and three-position step controllers with external position feedback (S= and S=). Adaptive filter The control difference xd is fed through an adaptive filter. By adjusting tfi or tfii (onpa) from off to s the filter is switched on. By further increases to tf* the filter can be adapted to a lowfrequency disturbance frequency (seconds to hours time constant). Within a band in which changes repeatedly take place, changes are seen as disturbances by the filter and are filtered with the preset time constant tf*; Changes in a direction leading out of the band are passed unfiltered to the Pi(D) algorithm to enable fast control. If the disturbance level changes in time, the filter is automatically adapted to the new level. E t A t Figure -5 Effect of the adaptive non-linear filter The factory setting of tfi and tfii is s. In controllers with D-part it should be set as great as possible because of the input noise amplified by vv Kp and in the adaptation (see chapter 4.4, page 9). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

94 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation Manual Response threshold AH The response threshold AH (dead zone element) is in the control difference connected after the adaptive filter. x d output -AH AH x d input Figure -5 Effect of the dead zone element The dead zone element lends the controller a progressive behavior, at small control differences the gain is low or even, at larger control differences the specified Kp is reached. It should be taken into account that the remaining control difference can adopt the value of the set response threshold AH. The factory setting of AH is % and can be set up to % in the parameterization mode onpa. In S-controllers the minimum necessary setting of AH is given by the minimum Δx=ks Δy (see chapter 4., page 8) and can be increased for further calming of the controlled system. In K-controllers a small threshold value is advisable for calming the control circuit and reducing wear. Parameter switching The single controllers, i.e. fixed setpoint controllers with two independent setpoints, fixed set-point controllers with two dependent setpoints, DDC-fixed setpoint controllers, follow-up controllers (synchronized controllers, SPC-controllers) and ratio controllers operate with the parameter set I and can be switched via the control signal PAU = to the parameter set II. Both parameter sets are separately adjustable in the parameter mode onpa. Every parameter set contains the parameters vv, cp, tn tv, AH, Yo, YA and YE with the ID I or II. The switching facility is conceived for -batch mode and should be performed manually since it cannot be bumpless in automatic operation. Double controllers (cascade control, ratio cascade control and override control) operate with the separately adjustable parameter sets I and II for the controllers I and II. There is no longer a possibility of parameter switching by the control signal PAU. Parameter control With the structure switch S59 the parameter sets I or II can be replaced by a controlled parameter set except for YA and YE. In double controllers one of the two controllers can operate with controlled parameters. In single controllers the controlled parameter set can be used for operation and additionally it can be switched to a fixed parameter set by the control signal PAU. The 94 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

95 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation parameters cp (Kp), tn, tv, AH and Yo are controlled by a straight line with 5 vertex points at %, %, 5 %, 7 % and 9 % of the controlling variable. The controlling variable is selected by S6. All control-relevant, controller-internal variables are available. S59 PAU active parameter set Parameter set I Parameter set II controlled parameter set Parameter set II Parameter set I controlled parameter set Table -7 active parameter sets for single controllers depending on S59 and control signal PAU The parameters are set manually per vertex point (identified by the suffix,, 5, 7, 9 for %, %, 5 %, 7 %, 9 % of the controlling variable in structuring mode PAST. Beyond the marginal vertex points and 9 % the set values remain constant. (Exception: Yo can be controlled over the whole range to %.) For parameters which do not need to be controlled, same values are set for all vertex points. The derivative action gain vvc is not controllable but can be set in the range from. to. When controlling tv a supplementary condition must be satisfied: tv. to tv.9 must either be all = off (Pi or P controller) or all off (PID or PD controller). Otherwise the error message tv/err appears when jumping out of the structuring mode PAST with the Exit key (see chapter.., page 75). Yo is controllable in the range from to % and then acts like a fixed set operating point. Yo = Auto can also be set, in this case no parameter control takes place but the operating point is set automatically in nonautomatic operation (see operating point in P-controller). Yo. to Yo.9 must either be set all = Auto or all Auto. Otherwise the error message Yo/Err appears when jumping out of the structuring mode PASt with the Exit key (see chapter.., page 75). Typical controlling variables are the control difference xd (it acts as jxdj) for progressive controls and x or y for operating point dependent controls (non-linear controlled systems). If S6 = 7 is set, a controling variable of % is simulated in Pi operation and a controlling variable of % in P operation. In this way you can work with large Kp (cp.) for example in P operation (control signal P=) to reach the operating point quickly. After switching to Pi operation (control signal P=) a reduced Kp (cp.) is active for a stable control. The parameter values and the value of the controlling variable can be gained by adaptation (see section Adaptation on the next page). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

96 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation Manual cp=kp cp cp.7 4 cp.5 cp. cp % xd % SG= jxdj Figure -54 Example of a Kp control with jxdj as a controlling variable for progressive control Adaptation (S58) The adaptation procedure represents a reliable and easy to operate commissioning tool. The adaptation procedure is far superior to manual optimization especially in slow controlled systems and in PIC controller types. It is activated by the operator and can be aborted at any time in the event of danger. The parameters determined by the adaptation can be changed and accepted specifically by the user. Non-linear control lines can also be mastered in connection with the parameter control. In the parameterization mode AdAP which is only accessible at S58, the following presettings are made for the adaptation procedure: tu Monitoring time dpv Direction of step command dy Amplitude of step command With the structure switch S58 the choice of the control behavior (with or without overshoot) is made. The adaptation principle is divided into line identification and controller design. Line identification The controller is driven to the desired operating point manually. By pressing the Enter key the set manual manipulated variable is changed by a step adjustable in the direction (dpv) and amplitude (dy). The y-step is output at the end of % of the set monitoring time (tu) if there was a fixed state of the controlled variable during this time. Otherwise there is an error message with abortion of the identification (see chapter.., table, page 77). 96 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

97 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation The step response of the controlled system is then accepted with a max. 84 value pairs (time and amplitude). The respective main controlled variable of the different control types is filtered adaptively (see figures -5, page 5 to figure -4, page 8) to use for controlled variable measurement. The measured values are read in with a scanning rate according to the cycle time. The noise level is suppressed by the adaptive filter. The storage procedure operates with cyclic data reduction and subsequent refilling so that slow controlled systems can be entered. After the start ID has been run through (the controlled variable x must have left the start ID band within 5% of the set monitoring time tu), 95% of the full range must have been reached at the latest at / of tu. The set monitoring time (tu) must be T95 of the controlled system with safety reserve. The remaining time is required for the full scale identification. The full scale identification can also take place immediately after the start identification, but / of the performed measurements are always required for the full scale identification. Recording of the measured value pairs is ended on identifying the full scale. A comparison with the recorded transient function is now made based on the stored Ptn models with n = to 8 and equal time constants T by variation of n and T. The determined line gain ks is transfered to the line models. The comparison is made over the minimum error area F (n, T) Additionally a special entry of real dead times is made which then shifts the identified control line to higher orders. Control lines with compensation and periodic transient of st to 8th order with a transient time T95 of 5 s to h can be identified. Dead time parts are permissible. In S-controllers the transient time T95 should be twice the positioning time Ty. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

98 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation Manual y Δy y manual x x M F(n,T)=min tu Model curve x M x measuring process Δx =ks Δy - Start ID 5 67 % Full scale ID % tu ID fixed state Start of adaptation Figure -55 Time curve of an adaptation without error messages in which tu = T95 Error checks are made during line identification in order to be able to prematurely abort the identification. There are control steps altogether which are displayed by flashing on the digital x- and w- displays when errors occur. As soon as an error message appears, the line identification is aborted and it must be restarted after correcting the presettings in the parameterization mode AdAP if necessary. Acknowledgement of the error messages, see table - Error messages of the adaptation procedure, page 77. Controller design The controller is designed according to the amount optimum method (S58=). This setting method is very robust and also allows variation of the line amplification. However, it generates an overshoot of approx. 5 % in the event of changes in the command variables. If this is not wanted, you can also work with the controller design without overshoot (S58 = ), Kp is reduced here to 8 %. The controller is designed for PI and PID behavior, therefore kp, tn and for PID tv are calculated, whereby the derivative action gain is fixed at 5. A prerequisite is that the D-element is connected with xd or x (S55 = or ). In S-controllers the response threshold AH is calculated in addition to kp, tn, tv. The parameters ta, te and ty must be set beforehand according to the actuating drives used (see chapter 4., page 8). If the transient time T95 is near to ty (floating time) overshooting may also occur in controller designs with D-part at S58=. 98 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

99 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) In controlled systems of the st order a Pi or PID controller design cannot be implemented according to the amount optimum, in systems of nd order a PID controller design cannot be implemented because in these cases Kp goes to. A controller design is made in which the ratio of system time constant to control circuit constant is (S58 = ) or (S58 = ). After completion of adaptation the previously active old parameters (identified by.o) and the newly determined parameters (identified by.n) can be read in the parameterization mode AdAP. The new parameters for Pi-controllers and for PID-controllers are offered. In addition the determined line order to 8 is displayed as a suffix to the Pi or PID identification. The selected parameters **., **.n Pi.* or **.n PID.* (** = parameter name, * = line order to 8) can be changed and accepted optionally. The operating technique of the adaptation procedure is described in chapter.., page 75, the commissioning explained in chapter 4.5, page..5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Three different controller output structures are connected after the controller I depending on the structrue switch S: S= K-controller S= S-controller with internal feedback S= S-controller with external feedback.5.6. S = : Continuous (K) controller (Fig. -56, page and fig. -57, page ) For activating P-action usually pnemumatic final control elements or as a master controller in cascades. In the K-controller the automatic manipulated variable ya of the controller I can be processed directly without further conversion. The manipulated variable y is followed by two split range-outputs y and y for actuator operation. The manipulated variable y is divided into two individual manipulated variables adjustable by the parameters Y and Y (structuring mode ofpa). Via S65 you can select the split range functions rising falling (y actuator heating y actuator cooling) or rising rising (y actuator control range y actuator control range ). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

100 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual Split range function rising falling (S65 = ) y, y [%] Y Y Cooling y y Heating tanα = tanβ = % % - Y % Y β α y[%] Y Y y-display Figure -56 Split range function rising falling With the parameters Y and Y, the point of intersection of the characteristics y and y is setwiththe%line.ycanbesetasyoulikeinrelationtoy.asaruleagapof6to% is left between cooling end and heating start to save energy. Depending on the design of the cooling and heating aggregate, related to the control range of the controlled variable, the different line gains can be compensated by different slope settings and good control results achieved in both branches. As a rule the cooling aggregate is underdimensioned for cost reasons so that the slope of Y needs to be greater than that of Y. The manipulated variable display at S67= is made for the outputs y and y by an ID I and II. Therefore only two positions are available for displaying the respective manipulated variable value so that values from % are identified by h. In the center of the dead zone the display changes from y to y. When the characteristics Y and Y overlap, the display changes at Y = 5 %. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

101 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Split range function rising rising (S65 = ) y, y [%] y y α β Y Y Y Y tanα = % Y % tanβ = % - Y y[%] ydisplay Figure -57 Split range function rising rising With the parameter Y the point of intersection of the manipulated variable y is set with the % line, with parameter Y the point of intersection of the manipulated variable y of the % line is set. Y can be set as you like in relation to Y. Depending on the design of the actuators, related to the control range of the controlled variable, the different system gains can be compensated by different slope settings and good control results achieved over the whole control range. The manipulated variable display at S67= is made for the outputs y and y by an ID I and II. Therefore only positions are available for displaying the respective manipulated variable value so that values above % are identified by h. The output y is displayed until the output Y has reached a value %. Floating time ty At S6 = (absolute value preset of YN) the positioning speed of the automatic variable is set with ty. In the off position, no limiting takes place, in positions to s the minimum floating time for to % manuipulated variable is preset. The P, I and D part as well as the disturbance variable Z is limited in the rise speed. This positioning speed limiting is always used when the following final control element has floating times > s to prevent integral saturations or when the process cannot stand the hard impacts of the P, D or Z-part. In this case it must be taken into account that the control time is greater. At S6 = (incremental preset of YN) ty is used for the positioning speed setting of the integrator. The floating time for to % change is preset. In the off position the integrator output changes suddenly. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

102 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual see chapter.5.7, figure -69, page Controller I y Y y ty YA YE ya Y PID S64 A y N y S65 /4 H Y N/DDC Si y E S / 4/5 DDC S66 / f(y,y) ys y ES S6 y N Δ y N S67 y H y ty S68 off y ES / S ty / 4/5 <> y H yh ES SES y R FE6(onlywithS4= see chapter ).5. fig. -5, page 4 and chapter.5., fig. -6, page 6 ybl ybl y N FE5 see chapter.5. figure -5, page 4 Δy Δy see chapter.5., pg. Fig. -7, page 8 see chapter.5., Fig. -7, page 8 Figure -58 Block diagram K-controller S = Follow-up (DDC) has priority over manual operation S6 = SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

103 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) see chapter.5.7, figure -69, page Controller I y Y ty YA YE y ya PID Y A y N S64 y S65 /4 N/DDC Y H y E 4/5 S Si / / DDC S6 S66 f(y,y) ys y H y ES y N y N Δ S67 / y H ty y S68 y ES off S ty // 4/5 <> y H yh ES SES y R FE6(onlywithS4=) ybl ybl y N FE5 Δy Δy see chapter.5. fig. -5, page 4 and chapter.5., fig. -6, page 6 see chapter.5., Fig. -7, page 8 see chapter.5. figure -5, page 4 see chapter.5., Fig. -7, page 8 Figure -59 Block diagram K-controller S = Manual operation has priority over follow-up (DDC) S6 = SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

104 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual.5.6. S = : Three-position step (S) -controller with internal feedback To control I-acting motorized actuating drives. In S-controllers with internal feedback the K-controller is followed by an internal position controller. The positioning control circuit consists of a comparator with following three-position switch with hysteresis and an integrator in the feedback. The I-function of the actuator is simulated by the integrator with adjustable floating time ty (parameterization mode onpa) which replaces the position feedback. To ensure the internal integrator and the K-controller output do not drift apart or into saturation in time, both are set back rhythmically by the same amount (synchronized). The y-output is only a relative manipulated variable (y ). It is therefore not possible to perform a manipulated variable limiting of ya and an absolute value preset of ye and ys. The safety manipulated variable ys is preset as a direction-dependent continuous contact. At YS < 5 % (ofpa), Δy switches,atys 5 %, Δy switches to continuous contact so that the end positions represent the safety position. The position controller has an adjustable minimum pulse length (te) and pause (ta) with which the response threshold of the position controller is set indirectly: Switching on A ee = Switching off A ea = % te ty % te ty Hysteresis A ee A ea = % te ty Pause A a = % ta ty ty set floating time (parameterization mode onpa) After a pulse pause A ee must be set up at least as a deviation until an actuating pulse with length te is output. A ea can remain as a constant control error of the position control circuit. A a can be set up after an actuating pulse as a deviation until an actuating pulse is output in the same or opposite direction. When time ta has expired, the position controller reacts accordingly to the set te. Setting criteria of ta and te, see chapter 4., page 8. The position feedback y R via FE6 is only used to display the manipulated variable in S-controllers with internal feedback. If it is not connected, S67 is set to, the y-display (4) is then dark. 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

105 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Controller I PID y N y H ya A H y H < > <> y H S64 < > < > y Syn. ty YA YE & & ybl ybl internal position control circuit ty S67 see chapter.5., Fig. -7, page 8 N/DDC YS Si y N Δ YS YS< 5 YS> 5 y S68 Δy Δy see chapter.5., Fig. -7, page 8,oFF BA7 BA8 FE6 y R Δy Δy see chapter.5.8, Fig. -7, page μ E see chapter.5. fig. -5, page 4 and chapter.5., fig. -6, page 6 y Figure -6 Block diagram S-controller with internal feedback S = Follow-up (DDC) has priority over manual operation S6 = SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

106 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual internal position control circuit Controller I PID ya A N/DDC y N y N Δ y H < > Δy <> y H YS YS < > y Syn. ty YA YE & & ybl ybl ty see chapter.5., Fig. -7, page 8 Δy see chapter.5., Fig. -7, page 8 H y H S64 Si YS< 5 YS> 5 y S68 S67,oFF BA7 BA8 FE6 y R Δy Δy see chapter.5.8, Fig. -7, page μ see chapter.5. fig. -5, page 4 and chapter.5., fig. -6, page 6 E y Figure -6 Block diagram S-controller with internal feedback S = Manual operation has priority over follow-up (DDC) S6 = 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

107 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68).5.6. S = : Three-position step (S) controller with external feedback To control I-acting motorized actuating drives. In S-controllers with external feedback the internal position control circuit is replaced by a real position controller (with the K-controller output y as a setpoint and the position feedback yr via FE6 as an actual value). As a result a manipulated variable limiting of ya and an absolute value preset of ye and ys are now possible. With the absolute value preset of ye it is also possible to preset the manual manipulated variable via the SES as an absolute value yes in follow-up operation. If y E is preset via the follow-up input yn (FE5), the freely connectable input range (S4=) must be used because in the permanently connected input range, FE5 is not available at S= (see fig. 4). Here too the response threshold of the position controller is preset with the parameters te (minimum turn-on duration) and ta (minimum turn-off duration) in connection with ty (floating time). Switching on A ee =4 Switching off A ea = Hysteresis A ee A ea = Pause A a = % te ty % te ty % te ty % ta ty If a control deviation of xds A ee is set up, the three-position switch switches direction-dependently to continuous contact. xds is reduced by the negative follow-up of the position control circuit until xds <A ea is reached. The continuous contact is now switched off. After the pause time ta pulse of length te are output with subsequent pause time ta until xds A ee is reached. Δy -Aea-Aee Aea Aee -Δy xds These single pulses are also output if xds coming from zero does not reach A ee. These single pulses which are not fully transformed into the path change (rotational movement) additionally calm the control circuit, i.e. in theory (without lag) the single pulses would switch off at.5 or.5 A ee. The opposite direction can only occur at appropriate control deviation after the pause time ta. The control difference of the position control circuit xds can be measured at assigmment to an analog output. Manual adjustment via the front panel is made at S67= here too as an incremental adjustment by overmodulating the three-position switch so that manual adjustment is possible even when the position feedback is interrupted. To simplify commissioning of the position control circuit, the manual manipulated variable is preset absolutely at S67= (manipulated variable of the K-controller) so that the setpoint of the position control circuit is changed continuously in this structure switch position to enable optimization (see chapter 4.). It should be taken into account here that the manual SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

108 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual manipulated variable which is also displayed is changed faster by the floating time than the active manipulated variable on the actuator and a lag therefore takes place. The controlling status can be monitored on the Δy-LEDs (5) in the y-display. After optimization, S67 should be set to to display the active manipulated variable via the position feedback y R (FE6). 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

109 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) ya H /4 4/5 N/DDC / S6 y N ty YA YE / S ty y N Δ / S Si ty Controller I PID y N y H y H yh ES SES A y E y N FE5 y ES y ES ys Δy Δy <> y H / 4/5 S64 y S68 y see Figure -5, Page 4 see Figure -7, Page 8 S67 see fig. -69, page external position control circuit y xds ty YA YE & &,off ybl ybl see fig. -7, page 8 BA7 BA8 FE6 y R Δy Δy see Fig. -7, page α E seefigure-5, Page 4 y Figure -6 Block diagram S-controller with external feedback S = Follow-up (DDC) has priority over manual operation S6 = SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

110 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual ya A N/DDC y E 4/5 S / / S6 y N y ES y ES y N FE5 see Figure -5, Page 4 S64 /4 y H <> ty YA YE H ys y H y H Si ys / // 4/5 S ty yh ES SES y S68 y S67 y xds ty YA YE & & BA7 BA8 Controller I see Fig. -69, page external position control circuit FE6 y R,oFF PID ybl ybl y N see figure -7, Page8 Δy Δy α y N Δ see fig. -7, page E y ty Δy Δy see Figure -7, Page 8 Figure -6 Block diagram S-controller with external feedback S = Manual operation has priority over follow-up (DDC) S6 = SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

111 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Control signals Message signals Digital inputs Front Front Digital outputs ybl Si N ) He Hi as above H LED.9 5).9 5) y-ext. LED H as above N active y y a (n) y H (n), ( ) y H (n), ( ) y H (n), ( ) y E (n) ) y E (n) y E (n) y E (n) y ) BL y ) BL y 4) S Explanation Automatic mode Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode Follow-up operation Follow-up operation Follow-up operation Follow-up operation Blocking mode Blocking mode Safety operation Table -8 Output switching of all controller types except DDC fixed setpoint controller (S = ) Follow-up operation has priority over manual operation (S6 = ) Control signals Message signals active y Explanation Digital inputs Front Front Digital outputs ybl Si N ) He Hi as above H LED,9 5),9 5) y-ext. LED.5.5 6).5 H as above N y a (n) y H (n), ( ) y H (n), ( ) y H (n), ( ) y E (n) ) y H (n), ( ) y H (n), ( ) y H (n), ( ) y ) BL y ) BL y 4) S Automatic mode Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode Follow-up operation Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode Blocking mode Blocking mode Safety operation Table -9 Output switching of all controller types except DDC fixed setpoint controller (S = ) Manual operation has priority over follow-up operation (S6 = ) ) The table is shown for static Nswitching (S48 = ) ) Source for y E is at S6= y N viafe5,ats6=y NΔ via Δy if S<, at S= y ES via the SES. The external manipulated variable is followed up which is fed in via Δy (y NΔ ) and via the SES (y ES ). When feeding in via FE5 (y N ) the feeding controller must be followed up. ) The blocking mode acts direction-dependently, changes in the opposite direction are possible. 4) Function y S in S-controllers with internal feedback (S = ) open or close otherwise parameterizable safety manipulated variable. 5).9 flashing rhythm. off,.9 on 6).5 flashing rhythm : n Followed up to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching adjustable SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

112 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual Automatic mode (y=y a) Automatic operation is switched on with the Automatic/Manual key (yellow manual LED(8) off). All other control signals He, N (DDC), Si and ybl must be. The automatic manipulated variable is connected through to the controller output. Manual mode (y=y H) Manual operation is switched on by the Automatic/Manual key (yellow manual LED(8) an) or the control signal He as an OR function. The control signals Si and ybl must be. If follow-up operation has priority over manual operation (S6=), the control signal N (DDC) must also be. The manual manipulated variable is through connected to the controller output. The manual manipulated variable is preset in K-controllers as an absolute value, in S- controllers as a positioning increment. Follow-up(DDC) mode (y=y E) The follow-up mode is switched on by the control signal N (in DDC mode by the control signal CB and the Internal/External key.5.4, page 4). The control signals Si and ybl must be. If manual mode has priority over follow-up mode (S6=) the control signal H=Hi v He must be. The external manipulated variable y E is connected through to the controller output. The source for y E is preset at S = or as an absolute value (y N ) via the function input FE5 (S6=) or as an external manipulated variable with incremental adjustment by the control signals Δy (y N Δ ) (S6 = ). The incremental adjustment runs at the adjustment speed %/ty. With S = the absolute value becomes active as an external manipulated variable via the SES (y ES ). In Scontrollers with internal feedback (S = ) absolute value presets of the manipulated variable are not possible, only the external manipulated variable with incremental adjustment (y N Δ) is available. Safety operation (y = y s) The safety operation is switched on by the control signal Si. The control signal ybl must be. The safety manipulated variable y s is through conencted which can be set as a parameter in the structuring mode ofpa in the range from to %. In Scontrollers with internal feedback (S = ) absolute value preset is not possible. When safety operation is active the output at YS<5 % is Δy continuous contact and at YS 5 % Δy continuous contact so that the actuator moves to the end positions. Direction dependent blocking operation Blocking operation is controlled by the control signals ybl. All other control signals have no function. If a control signal is applied the manipulated variable output is blocked direction-dependently, i.e. only changes in the opposite direction are allowed. If both control signals are applied simultaneously, the output is blocked absolutely. The direction-dependent blocking is necessary especially in S-controllers with internal feedback and actuators with limit stop switches to avoid integral saturation. If the control circuit is opened on reaching the end position of the actuator, further integration of the controller must be prevented in order to be able to react immediately in the event of control difference reversal. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

113 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) As described above, the control signals ybl have priority over Si and H or N. Priority of H or N can be selected via S6. All these operating modes have priority over automatic operation. Signaling of the switching states is made by the LEDs Manual (8) and y-external (). If manual operation is active or preselected (if the prioritized operating modes are active), the Manual LED lights up. He = (via control signal) is signaled by a flashing rhythm of 9.9 when Hi = (via Manual/Automatic switch i.e. is in automatic operation). When switching the control signal He from automatic operation becomes active. Follow-up (DDC), safety and blocking operation is signaled by the y-external LED. Flashing rhythm.5 indicates that in manual operation priority over follow-up operation, manual operation is active but follow-up operation is prepared and after switching to automatic operation also becomes active. Blocking of the manual/automatic switching (S64) With S64 Manual/Automatic switching can be blocked in the operating modes only automatic or only manual (see figure -6, page 7). The other operating modes are still possible. The follow-up operation only if follow-up has priority over manual operation. Manual mode in event of transmitter fault S6 With S6 it is possible to switch to manual mode when the transmitter group fault message occurs (see chapter.5., page ). Manual operation starts at S6= with the last y or at S6 = with the parameterized YS. In both cases the manual manipulated variable can be adjusted with the Δy keys after switching. Source and direction of effect of the y-display S67, S68 With S67 the y-display is switched to the different display sources or switched off. The absolute manipulated variable y or the split range manipulated variables y and y can be displayed in K-controllers or the position feedback message/command signal y R via FE6 in S-controllers. With S68 the display direction rising falling can be selected (see chapter 4.). Control system coupling via the serial interface In addition to the DDC controller (S = ) the SPC controller (S = ) a complete parallel process operation is possible in all controller types via the serial interface. The control signals Int and Hi (via HeES at S64 = /4, see chapter.5., page 4) and the process variables wi and yh can be written at S via the serial interface so that switching from internal to external setpoint and Automatic/Manual switching is possible in all controller types. If the internal setpoint wi or the manual manipulated variable yh is active it can also be changed by the SES or the adjusting keys on the front panel. Since the SES can only adjust absolutely and not incrementally, it is advisable to use the setpoint ramp (ts) or the dynamic manipulated variable with ty to avoid steps. This parallel front operation via the serial interface can be locked at S64 = via RC = Int CB (see chapter.5.). This locking facility for the operation via SES on the controller front is only useful in the controller types fixed setpoint controller with a setpoint (S = ) and follow-up controller without Internal/External switching (S = ) because in all other controller types both the Internal key and the control signal CB have other additional SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

114 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual functions. At S64 = 4 this locking facility is omitted and operation is always parallel to the front keys. To avoid simultaneous actuation by the controller front and the SES the last switching action can be read both on the process control system and the controller. For this, a status bit is set when writing IntES and HeES which is only reset when the front keys Int or Hi are actuated. By requesting the status bit, the process control system can issue a warning when the last operation took place via the front. If the last operation took place via the SES the warning SES flashes for s in the x/w display when the Internal key or the Manual key is pressed. This initial pressing of the keys does not activate a switching function, only when the keys are pressed again is the desired switching function triggered. Output structure controller II at S = With S = a second parallel independent control channel is released. Operation and monitoring of both control circuits take place on two levels which are selected with the Shift key and signaled by the displays I or II. The functions of the output structure of the controller II correspond to those of the controller I; only exception: incremental manipulated variable adjustment is not possible. The effect of the respective duplicated structure switches and parameters can be seen in the following block diagrams. 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

115 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Controller II PID y N II y H II HII / yiih ES SES AII /4 NII S4 SiII S y E II S4 / / 4/5 ysii yii ES y N II FE9 <> y H tyii YAII YEII / 4/5 S tyii only S= yblii yblii NII y R II FE OFF S4 y y4 y4 S4 S44 f(y,y4) y yii y y4 Figure -64 Block diagram K-controller S = Follow-up has priority over manual operation S8 = SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

116 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual / S ty SES <> Controller II PID y N II FE9 tyii YAII YEII A NII S / 4/5 / yii ES H /4 y H S4 SiII ysii / 4/5 yiih E S yblii only S= yblii S4 NII OFF y R II FE S4 y y4 y4 S4 S44 f(y,y4) y yii y y4 Figure -65 Block diagram K-controller S = Manual operation has priority over follow-up S8 = 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

117 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) internal position control circuit Controller II PID AII HII < > <> y H S4 YSII < > y Syn. & & yblii yblii ty tyii taii teii SiII YSII YSII< 5 YSII> 5 y S44 onlys= S4,oFF BA5 BA6 FE y R II Δy Δy α E y Figure -66 Block diagram S-controller with internal feedback S = SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

118 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Manual Controller II PID y N II FE9 A NII H /4 S4 S yii / / YS SiII yii ES <> YAII YEII onlys= 4/5 y YSII y H // 4/5 / S tyii y S44 S4,oFF yii HES SES external position control circuit tyii taii teii & & BA5 BA6 FE y R II yblii yblii Δy Δy α E y Figure -67 Block diagram S = Manual operation has priority over follow-up S8 = 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

119 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.6 Controller output structures (S, S6 to S68) Controller II PID y N y H y H ya A H / S / 4/5 tyii yii HES SES /4 NII y N II FE9 S4 4/5 / y N y E / S y ES yii ES YSII <> y H YAII YEII onlys= yii SiII S4 y S44 y,off external position control circuit tyii taii teii & & BA5 BA6 FE y R II yblii yblii Δy Δy α E y Figure -68 Block diagram S-controller with external feedback S = Follow-up has priority over manual operation S8 = SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

120 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.7 Analog output signal processing (S69 to S75, S47 to S57) Manual.5.7 Analog output signal processing (S69 to S75, S47 to S57) The analog outputs AA to AA (standard controller) are assigned to the controller-internal variables by the structure switches S7 to S75. By using the modules AA (6DR8-8A) or AA (6DR8-8B) in the slots 5 (S=4/6) and 6 (S=4/6) the number of analog outputs can be increased to 9. Every output can be structured alternatively to or 4 to ma. The bipolar process variables xdi, xdii du xds are output with an offset of 5 % and optionally reversed direction. % y y y AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A FE FE FE FE4 FE5 FE6 5 %xdi 5%xdI xi wi xv wv 5 %xdii 5%xdII xii wii 5%xds 5%xds yii y y 4 AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA FE7 FE8 FE9 FE FE FE S** Assignment with S7 S74 S75 S5 S5 S54 S55 S56 S57 4tomA 4tomA 4tomA 4tomA 4tomA 4tomA 4tomA 4tomA 4tomA S69 S7 S7 S7 S47 S48 S49 S5 S5 = = = = = = U U U Slot 6 6DR8-8B (S=6) = = U U U U U I I I I I I I I AA AA AA AA4 AA5 AA6 Slot 5 6DR8-8B (S=6) = U I AA7 AA8 AA8 / / /4 Slot 6 6DR8-8A (S=4) = U 6/4 AA4 I 6/5 6/6 5/4 5/5 5/6 = Slot 5 6DR8-8A (S=4) U I AA7 6/5 5/5 Figure -69 Assignment analog outputs SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

121 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.8 Digital output signal processing (S76 to S9 and S58 to S66).5.8 Digital output signal processing (S76 to S9 and S58 to S66) seefigure-7 The message signals RB, RCto MUF, IntI, RBII to IntII, FE9 to FE are negated by the structure switches S86 to S96 optionally and assigned to the digital outputs BA to BA6 by the structure switches S76 to S85 and S58 to S66. The digital outputs BA to BA8 of the standard controller can be extended with the option modules 4BA 4 VBE (6DR8-8E) or BA relay 5 V (6DR8-8A) in the slots 5 and 6 to a maximum 6 digital outputs. When using 4BA 4 VBE in slot 5 by BA9 to BA, in slot 6 by BA to BA6. When using BA relay 5 V in slot 5 by BA9 and BA, in slot 6 by BA and 4. When using option modules in the slots 5 and 6 the structure switches S and S are set according to the assembly, other settings lead to error messages (see chapter.4., page ). The control signals Δy (positioning increments of the S-controller) are not assigned and not negatable. When structuring S-controllers (S = or ) they are always at BA7 and BA8, i.e. BA7 and BA8 can only be assigned freely in K-controllers (S = ). At S= and S= or the positioning increments of the Scontroller II are output according to BA5 and BA6. On assigning different control signals to the same digital output an OR function of the control signals is produced. Unassigned digital outputs (switch position ) are low and can be set by SES at S =. All digital outputs have wired-or-diodes. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

122 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.8 Digital output signal processing (S76 to S9 and S58 to S66) Manual RB =Int or IntII RC =Int CB H ΔyII ΔyII Δy Δy N A A A A4 MuF IntI RBII RCII HII NII IntII S86 S87 S88 Assignment with S76 S77 S78 S89 S79 S9 S8 S9 S8 S9 S8 S9 S8 S9 S84 S9 S9 S85 S86 S58 S87 S59 S88 S6 S89 S6 S9 S6 FE9 >5 % S6 FE >5 % S64 FE >5 % S65 FE >5 % S66 S** NO assignment BAs = ) 5V 4 V I BA BA BA BA4 /4 /5 /6 /7 S BA5 / /8 S BA6 / /9 S BA7 / / S BA8 / / Slot 5 5V 4 V I 4BABE S= ) 5V Slot 6 4 V I 4BABE S= ) BA9 BA BA BA BA BA4 BA5 BA6 5/ 5/ 5/4 5/5 6/ 6/ 6/4 6/5 ) When using BA-relays 5 V, 6DR8-8A (S= or S=) only BA9 and BA or BA and BA4 are available. ) At S**= there is no assignment, the digital outputs are then and can be set at S > by the SES. ) Assignment of different control signals to one digital output causes an OR function. Figure -7 Assignment of digital outputs SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

123 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.8 Digital output signal processing (S76 to S9 and S58 to S66) Functional explanation of the digital message signals RB RC H N No computer standby of the controller This signal indicates that the controller is in internal operation, i.e. not in computer standby. In cascade controllers (double controllers) this signal relates to the master controller, in override controls to the main controller. No computer operation This signal indicates the negated computer operation RC = Int CB and controls the setpoint switching or the DDC operation. In cascade controllers this message relates to the master controller, in override controls to the main controller. Manual mode The controller is in manual mode, triggered either by manual/automatic switching on the front of the controller (Hi) or by the binary signal He if the control signals Si, ybl and N (with follow-up over manual operation priority) are Low. Follow-up mode The controller is in follow-up mode when the control signals Si, ybl and H (in manual over follow-up operation priority) are Low. A/A Alarm and indicate response of the limit value alarms A and A. A/A4 Alarm and 4 indicates response of the limit value alarms A and A4. MUF IntI Δy Transmitter fault The analog input signals of the controller can be monitored for exceeding of the range. This signal gives a group alarm if an error is detected. Internal operation of the slave controller This signal indicates that the cascade in cascade controllers (double controllers) is disconnected to Internal by Internal/External switching of the follow-up controller. Position increments for the Δy-adjustment in S-controllers Message signals RBII, RCII, HII, NII, IntII, ΔyII are only active at S= and have the same meanings for controller II as above. FE9 to FE The analog signals are converted by comparators into digital signals (> 5 % ) SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

124 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.9 Limit value alarms (S94 to S, S67 to S68) Manual.5.9 Limit value alarms (S94 to S, S67 to S68) Every limit value alarm A, A, A, A4 is assigned by the structure switches S94, S95, S67, S68 to the controller-internal variables xdi, xi to FE. With S67 = or S68 = (factory setting), the limit value alarms A, A or A, A4 are combined as pairs. In this case the assignment only takes place with S94 or S95, only hysteresis H. or H.4 are active. With S96 (A, A) or S97 (A, A4) the monitoring function Max/Min, Min/Min, Max/Max, Min/Max can be set. The response thresholds A to A4 and the hysteresis H., H.4, H., H4. can always be set in the structuring mode ofpa. According to the switch position of S98 only the display or the display and adjustment of A to A4 is possible in the process operation level. In this case the switching cycle of the Shift key () is extended by the response thresholds A to A4, displayed on the y-display (4): Controller I Controller II -A-A-A-A4ControllerI... The response thresholds are set depending on the assignment physically corresponding to the display format of the digital x or w display (see chapter.5.4, page 4) or in %: S S94, S95 S67, S68 assigned to Display format Parameter range 4 6 xdi xi wi according to dai bis dei -999 to 9999 maximum - % to % related to dei -dai = % 4 and 6 4 xdi xi wi xv wv % % % according to dai bis dei -999 to %to% maximum - % to % related to dei -dai = % 5 to xdii xii wii according to daii bis deii -999 to 9999 maximum - % to %relatedtodeii -daii = % to 8 # 7 y # FE % -%to% Table - Display format of the limit values A to A4 The hysteresis H., H.4, H., H4. is set in % in the range from. to %. The function of the limit values (Min oder Max) always relates to the display, i.e. in the case of a falling characteristic (de*<da*) the direction is reversed. The set Min function for example becomes a Max function related to the field signal. 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

125 Manual Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.9 Limit value alarms (S94 to S, S67 to S68) xdi xi wi xv wv xdii xii wii y y y AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A FE FE FE FE4 FE5 FE6 xds yii y y4 AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA FE7 FE8 FE9 FE FE FE xdi xdii S** Assignment with S94 S67 S95 S68 A Min. Max A Min. Max A S67 S68 Min. Max A4 Min. Max S96 S96 S97 S97 H. H. H. at S67 H. H. H4 at S68 A A A A4 Figure -7 Assignment and function of the limit value alarms SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

126 Technical Description.5 Functional description of the structure switches.5.restart conditions (S99, S) Manual.5. Restart conditions (S99, S) With S99 the restart conditions after mains recovery and manual reset are determined. In position the controller starts after mains recovery and after a watchdog reset with the operating mode and with the y which was active before the power failure. This variation must be used when temporary mains failures are to be expected in slow control circuits. In position start takes place after mains recovery in manual and Internal operation (in cascades also with IntI) with ys in the K-controller and with the last y in the S-controller. If only external operating mode or only automatic operation was selected by the structuring, the restart takes place in these operating modes. With S the optical signaling of mains voltage recovery and reset is determined by flashing of the digital x-display. The flashing is acknowledged by pressing the Shift key () or by an alarm request via SES..5. Serial interface and PROFIBUS-DP (S to S7) With S the depth of the SES interventions is preset. Generally all available set data can be read. In position no transmission and reception of data to the controller is possible. In position only parameters and structures can be transmitted. In the other positions the process variables wes (external setpoint via the SES) and yes (external manipulated variable via the SES) and all control signals can be transmitted by the SES. In this position the other possible sources for the external setpoint or the external manipulated variable are switched off. The structure switches S to S7 determine the transmission procedure through the serial interface. For further details, see the description Serial SIPART DR V.8 bus interface, order number C79-B7476-C55. Settings for PROFIBUS-DP: see table -8 Structure switch tables, page SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

127 Manual Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. General data.6 Technical Data.6. General data Installation position Climate class according to IEC7 Part - Storage k Part - Transport k Part - Operation k Type of protection according to EN 659 Front Housing Connections any 5 to 75 _C 5 to 75 _C to 5 _C IP64 IP IP Controller design D Electrical safety acc. to DIN EN 6 part, Protection class I acc. to IEC 56 Safe disconnection between mains connection and field signals Air and creep lines, unless specified otherwise, for overvoltage class III and degree of contamination D EC declaration of conformity number 69. D CE mark conformity regarding: EMC regulation 89/6/EWG and LV regulation 7//EWG D Spurious emission, interference immunity according to EN 6 6, NAMUR NE 8/98 Weight, max. assembled approx.. kg Color Front module frame RAL 77 Front surface RAL 75 Material Housing, front frame Front foil Rear panels, modules Polycarbonate, glass-fiber-reinforced Polyester Polybutylenterephthalate Connection technique Power supply 5/ V AC -pin plug IEC/V DIN 49457A 4 V UC Special -pin plug Field signals plug-in terminals for.5 mm AWG 4 Dimensions and panel cut-outs see figure -7 and -7 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

128 Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. General data Manual 8 7 max Relay module 6DR84-8A/B 8 45 ) ) Installation depth required to change the mainboard Figure -7 Dimensions SIPART DR, dimensions in mm 7.5 Nr. of controllers Cut-out width b 45 ) 68,7 b : : : 76 8 ) Installation close one above the other is allowed when the permissible ambient temperature is observed. Figure -7 Panel cut-outs, dimensions in mm 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

129 Manual Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Standard Controller.6. Standard Controller Power supply Rated voltage V AC 5 V AC 4 V UC switchable Operating voltage range 87 to 76 V AC 9 to 8 V AC to 8 V AC to 5 V DC ) Frequency range 48 to 6 Hz External current I Ext ) Power consumption Standard controller without options without I Ext active power/apparent power (capacitive) Standard controller with options without I Ext active power/apparent power (capacitive) Standard controller with options with I Ext active power/apparent power (capacitive) Permissible voltage interruptions ) Standard controller without options without I Ext Standard controller with options without I Ext Standard controller with options with I Ext 8W/7VA W/5 VA 6 W/45 VA 9 ms 8 ms 5 ms 8W/VA W/ VA 6 W/6 VA 7 ms 6 ms 5 ms 45 ma. 8W/VA W/8 VA 8 W/5 VA 55 ms 5 ms 5 ms 8W W 8 W ms 5 ms ms ) including harmonic ) current transmitted from L, BA, AA to external load ) The load voltage of the AA is reduced hereby to V, L to 5 V and the BA to 4 V Table - Power supply standard controller SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

130 Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Standard Controller Manual Analog inputs AE to AE and AE6 to AE (analog input module AE 6DR8-8A) Technical data under rated power supply conditions, _C ambient temperature unless stated otherwise. Voltage Rated signal range ( to % /99.6 to 998 mv or / to V shuntable Modulation range -4 to % Input resistance Difference Common mode > kω > 5 kω Common mode voltage to V Filter time constant 5 ms Zero error. % AD converter error End value error. % AD converter error Linearization error see AD converter Common mode error.7 %/V Temperature influence Zero point Full scale.5 %/ K.%/K Static destruction limit 5 V Current Rated signal range Modulation range Input resistance Difference (load) Common mode Common mode voltage Filter time constant Zero error End value error Linearization error Common mode error Temperature influence Zero point Full scale /4 to ma to ma 49.9 Ω. % > 5 kω to V 5 ms see AD converter see AD converter see AD converter.7 %/V.5 %/ K.%/K Analog outputs AA to AA Rated signal range ( to %) to ma or 4 to ma Modulation range to.5 ma or.8 to.5 ma Load voltage From to 8 V No-load voltage 6 V Inductive load. H Time constant ms Residual ripple 9 Hz. % Resolution bit SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

131 Manual Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Standard Controller Load dependence, % Zero error, % End value error, % Linearity.5 % Temperature influence Zero point Full scale.%/k.%/k Static destruction limit to 5 V Measuring transducer feed L Ratedvoltage Load current Short-circuit current Static destruction limit Digital inputs BE to BE4 Signal status Signal status Input resistance Static destruction limit to6v ma, shortcircuitproof ma clocking to 5 V 4.5 V or open V 7 kω 5 V Binary outputs BA to BA8 (with wired or diodes) Signal status.5 V Signal status 9 to 6 V Load current 5 ma Short-circuit current 8 ma, clocking Static destruction limit to 5 V Cycle time adaptive 6 ms to ms (typical 8 ms) A/D-conversion Procedure Modulation range 4 to % Resolution bit.6 % Zero error. % Full scale error. % Linearization error. % Temperature influence Zero point.5 %/ K Full scale.%/k Successive approximation per input > conversions and averaging of or 6.67 ms D/A conversion See technical data Analog inputs AA to AA SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

132 Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Standard Controller Manual Setpoint and manipulated variable adjustment Setting Speed Resolution wi y With two keys (more less) progressive digit. % Parameters Setting With keys (more less) Speed progressive Resolution Linear parameters, %. % Linear parameters, physical digit Logarithmic parameters 8 values/octave Accuracy Time parameters % All others Resolution accordingly, absolute Display technique x and w display digital 4 / digit 7-segment-LED Color x w red green Digit height 7 mm Display range Adjustable start and end Number range 999 to 9999 Overflow <999: ofl >9999: ofl Decimal point adjustable (fixed point) _. to Refresh rate adjustable.8 to 8, s ) Resolution digit but better than AD converter Display error corresponding to AD converter and analog inputs x and w display analog Color x w Display range Overflow Resolution Refresh rate red green flashing first or last LED.7 % by alternate glowing of or LEDs, the center of the illuminated field serves as a pointer cyclic y display (digital) -digit 7-segment LED Color yellow Digit height 7 mm Display range to % SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

133 Manual Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules Overflow to % Refrseh rate adjustable.8 to 8. s ) Resolution % ) typical cycle time.6. Technical data of the options modules 6DR8-8A AE I/U module Analog inputs AE6 to AE8 (slot 6), AE9 to AE (slot 5), see chapter.6., page 9, AE to AE 6DR8-8J/R Analog inputs AE4 (slot ), AE5 (slot ) Signal transformer for Range start Min. span ( %) Max. zero point suppression Range full scale Dynamic range Order number: Input resistance Difference Common mode Permissible common mode voltage Supply current Line resistance Two-wire circuit Three-wire circuit Four-wire circuit AE Current 6DR8-8J or4ma ) ma 4to% 49.9 Ω. % 5 kω tov AE Voltage 6DR8-8J VorV ) or 99.6 mv ) V, 998 mv 4to% kω kω tov AE Resistance potentiometer 6DR8-8R Ω ΔR. R ) RA. R ) RA. R ) 4to% 5mA 5% per < Ω Filter time constant % 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms Error ) Zero point Gain Linearity Common mode Influence of temperature ) Zero point Gain Stat. destruction limit between the input referenced to M. %.5 %.5 %.7 %/V.5 %/ K.%/K 4 ma 5 V. %. %.5 %. %/V. %/ K.%/K 5 V 5 V ) Measuring start by structuring ) without errors of the A converter ) with R = RA ΔR RE adjustable in three ranges: R = Ω, R = 5 Ω, R = Ω. %. %. %.%/K. %/ K 5 V 5 V Table - Technical data for I/U module 6DR88J/R SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

134 Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules Manual 6DR8-8V UNI module: Analog inputs AE4 (slot ), AE5 (slot ) Analog input AE4, AE5 mv ) TC ) Pt R R Slot, C R 6 Ω R.8 kω Range start MA Range full scale ME -75 mv 75 mv -75 mv 75 mv - C 85 C Ω 6 Ω Ω.8 kω Span Δ =ME-MA parameterizable to Δmax Min. recommended span 5mV 5mV K Ω 7 Ω Measuring transducer -.5 % MUF 6.5 % ) fault message MUF Input current μa μa Supply current 4 μa 4 μa 4 μa Potential isolation Test voltage 5 V AC perm. common mode voltage 5 V UC 5 V UC Line resistance L RLRL4 kω Ω 5 Ω L: (RL) = RL = RL4 5 Ω 4L: RL to RL4 Ω Open loop signaling without 5 to 55 Ω Error all terminals Open loop between terminal Transmission ± μv ± μv ±. K ±6 mω ± mω Linearity ± μv ± μv ±. K ±6 mω ± mω Resolution/noise ±5 μv ± μv ±. K ± mω ±7 mω Common mode ± μv/ V ± μv/ V Internal reference junction terminal ±.5 K Temperature error Transmission ±.5 %/ K ) Internal reference junction ±.K/K terminal Statistical destruction limit ±5 V ±5 V Cycle time ms ms ms ms ms Filter constant adaptive <.5 s < s < s <.5 s <.5 s ) ma, V with measuring for TC, internal connector 6DR85-8J ) types see CAE menu, internal reference junction terminal (pluggable terminal block) 6DR85-8A ) Referenced to parameterizable span Δ =MEMA Table - Technical data for UNI module 6DR8-8V 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

135 Manual Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules 6DR858J Measuring range plug ma/ V ma Conversion to mv ±. % Load between terminal 5 Ω 5 Ω Stat. destruction limit ±4 ma V Divider to mv ±. % Input resistance 9 kω Statistical destruction limit ± V 6DR8-8D BO Relay 5 V Binary outputs BA9 and BA (slot 5) or BA and BA4 (slot 6) Contact material Ag/Ni Contact load capacity Switching voltage AC DC Switching current AC DC Rating AC DC Service life mechanical electrical 4 V/4 A ohmic 4 V/ A inductive Spark quenching element Series circuit 5 V 5 V 5A 5A 5 VA W for 4 V 8 W for 5 V x 7 switching cycles x 6 switching cycles x 5 switching cycles μf/ Ω parallel to it varistor 75 Vrms SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

136 Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules Manual 6DR8-8E 4BA 4 V BE Digital outputs Signal status Signal status Load current Short-circuit current Static destruction limit Digital inputs Signal status Signal status Input resistance Static destruction limit Digital outputs BA9 to BA and digital inputs BE5 and BE6 (slot 5) or digital outputs BA to BA6 and digital inputs BE and BE (slot 6).5 V or open, residual current 5 μa 9 to 6 V ma 5 ma, clocking V to 5 V 4.5 V or open V.4 kω 5 V 6DR88C 5BE 4 V Digital inputs BE5 to BE9 (slot 5), BE to BE4 (Slot 6) Signal status Signal status Input resistance Statistical destruction limit 4.5 V or open V 7 kω ±5 V 6DR8-8A AA(y hold ) Analog outputs AA4 (Slot 6), AA7 (Slot 5) Analog output AA4/AA7 Rated signal range ( to %) to ma or 4 to ma Modulation range to.5 ma or.8 to.5 ma Load voltage for supply from controller by U H >,5 V by U H =V to8v to5v to.5v No-load voltage 6 V Inductive load. H Time constant ms Residual ripple 9 Hz. % Resolution. % Load dependence. % Zero error.% Full scale error. % Linearity.5 % 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

137 Manual Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules Temperature influence Zero point Full scale Static destruction limit Digital output St Signal status Signal status Load current Short-circuit current Static destruction limit,%/k,%/k to 5 V.5 V 9 to 6 V ma, short-circuit-proof 5 ma clocking to 5 V Auxiliary voltage U H Voltage range Current consumption for supply from controllers for supply by U H Static destruction limit to V (including harmonic) 6mA 7 ma 5 V 6DR88B AA and BE Analog outputs AA7 bis AA9, digital inputs BE5 to BE7 (slot 5); Analog outputs AA4 bis AA6 (slot 6), digital inputs BE to BE (slot 5); Analog outputs Rated signal range ( to %) to ma or 4 ma to ma Modulation range to.5 ma or.8 ma to.5 ma Load voltage from to 8 V No-load voltage 6 V Inductive load. H Time constant ms Residual ripple 9 Hz. % Resolution bit Load dependence. % Zero error. % Full scale error. % Linearity.5 % Temperature influence Zero point Full scale.%/k.%/k Static destruction limit to 5 V Digital inputs Signal status Signal status 4.5 V or open V SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 7

138 Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules Manual Input resistance Static destruction limit 7 kω 5 V 6DR8-8P PROFIBUS-DP Transferable signals RS 485, PROFIBUS-DP-protocol Transferable data Operating state, process variables, parameters and structure switches Transmission procedure PROFIBUS-/DPprotocol According to DIN 945, Part and Part (EN 57) Transmission speed 9.6 kbit/s to.5 Mbit/s Station number to 5 Time monitoring of the data traffic structurable on the controller in connection with DP-watchdog Electrical isolation between Rxd/Txd-P/-N and the controller 5 V UC common mode voltage Test voltage 5 V AC Repeater control signal CNTRP TTL-level with TTL load Supply voltage VP (5 V) 5 V -.4 V/. V; short-circuit proof Line lengths; per segment at.5 Mbit/s m; see ET-Manual 6ES5 998-ES for further details 6DR8-8C Serial interface Transferable signals RS, RS 485 or SIPART BUS*) shuntable *) SIPART bus operation no longer possible. The bus driver is no longer offered. Transferable data Operating state, process variables, parameters and strucrture switches Transmission procedure According to DIN 6658 A or B Character format bits (start bit, ASCII characters with 7 bits, parity bit and stop bit) Hamming distance h or 4 Transmission speed to 96 bit/s Transmission Asynchronous, semiduplex Addressable stations Time monitoring of the data traffic s to 5 s or without Electrical isolation between Rxd/Txd and the controller max. common mode voltage Test voltage 5 V UC 5 V AC 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

139 Manual Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules Receiver input Rxd Rxd Signal level Signal level ) Input resistance Send output Txd Signal level Signal level ) RS RS 485 tov ) - to - V ) kω kω ab Erzeugnisstand 8 5 to V -5 to - V U A >U B,,toV U A <U B,-.to-V Ω U A >U B,.5to6V U A <U B,-.5to-6V Load resistance.67 ma 54 Ω ) Signal status is the rest state ) Input protected with 4 V Z-diode, greater voltages possible with current limiting to 5 ma. Line capacitance or lengths at 96 bits/s Power capacitance Reference values line lengths Ribbon cable without shield Round cable with shield RS point-to-point.5 nf 5 m m RS 485 bus 5 nf m m 6DR84-8A/B Coupling relay V relay module 6DR84-8B relay module 6DR84-8A per relay module relays with switching contact each with spark quenching element Contact material silver-cadmium oxide Switching voltage AC 5 V DC 5 V switching current AC 8 A DC 8 A Rating AC 5 VA DC W at 5 V W at 4 V Service life silver-cadmium oxide mechanical 7 switching cycles electrical AC V, ohmic 6 /I(A)switching cycles SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 9

140 Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules Manual Spark quenching element Series circuit nf/ Ω parallel plus varistor 4 V rms Exciter winding Voltage Resistance Electrical isolation between Exciter winding contacts Relay module relay module contact contact of a relay module 9 to V. kω 8 Ω Safe isolation by reinforced isolation, air and creep lines for overvoltage class III and (6DR84-8A) degree of contamination (DIN EN 6 Teil ) Safe isolation by reinforced insulation, air and creep lines for overvoltage class II and degree of contamination (DIN EN 6 Teil ) Type of protection Casing IP5 according to DIN 45 Connections (in plugged state) IP according to DIN 45 Casing material Polyamide 66 Mounting rail assembly on NS 5/7.5 DIN EN 5 NS 5/5 DIN EN 55 NS DIN EN 55 Dimensioned diagram seefigure-74 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

141 Manual Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules 9 6 NS 5/5 NS.5 NS 5/ Center of the mounting rail Figure -74 Dimensioned diagram coupling relay, dimensions in mm SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 4

142 Technical Description.6 Technical Data.6. Technical data of the options modules Manual 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

143 Manual Installation. Mechanical Installation Installation. Mechanical Installation D Selecting the Installation Site Maintain an ambient temperature of to 5 _C. Don t forget to allow for other heat sources in the vicinity. Remember that if instruments are stacked on top of each other with little or no gap between them, additional heat will be generated. Front and rear sides of the controller must be easily accessible. D Panel mounting The SIPART DR is installed either in individual panel cutouts or in open tiers (for dimensioned diagram, see chapter.6., page 8 fig. -7, and fig. -7). The upper edge of the panel cut-out must be left unpainted to ensure good interference suppression of the controller even at high frequencies. A good HF ground connection is established by the contact spring protruding from the top of the SIPART DR. If necessary: Push self-adhesive sealing ring for sealing front frame/front panel over the tube and stick to the tube collar (see chapter 5., page, item.6). Insert SIPART DR into the panel cut-out or open tier from the front and fit the two clamps provided to the controller unit from the rear so that they snap into the cut-outs in the casing. Align SIPART DR and do not tighten the locking screws too tight. The tightening range isto4mm.. Electrical Connection The arrangement of the connecting elements can be seen in fig. -, page 45. WARNING! The Regulations for the installation of power systems with rated voltages under V (VDE ) must be observed in the electrical installation! D PE conductor connection Connect the PE conductor to the ground screw (see figure -) on the back of the controller. When connecting to 5 or V AC mains supply, the PE conductor can also be connected through the three-pin plug (see figure -). The controller s ground connection may also be connected with the PE conductor (grounded extra low voltages). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 4

144 Installation. Electrical Connection Manual WARNING! Disconnection of the PE conductor while the controller is powered up can make the controller potentially dangerous. Disconnection of the PE conductor is prohibited. D Power Supply Connection The power supply is connected on 5 V or V AC systems by a threepin plug IEC /V DIN A, on 4 V UC systems by a special pin plug (polarity irrelevant). The plugs are supplied with the unit. WARNING! Set the mains voltage selection switch (see figure -) in the novoltage state to the existing mains voltage. It is essential to observe the mains voltage specified on the rating plate or on the mains voltage switch (5/ V AC) or on the voltage plate (4 V DC)! Feed the power cables via a circuit breaker within easy reach (fire safety according to IEC 66E (sec) /DIN VDE 4 Part ). When connected to an unprotected power supply, the controller must be supplied via a circuit breaker. The circuit breaker is not required if one already exists ( Vrms or 4,4 V DC and current 8 A or source under all load conditions 5 VA or fuse element which responds at 5VA). The circuit breaker can be omitted if the 4 V UC power supply is protected by 4 A (5 V DC) (T,5 A is required at least). D Connection of measuring and signal lines The process signals are connected via plug-in terminal blocks that can accommodate cables of up to.5 mm (AWG 4) cross-section. Standard controller Slot 4- and -pin Option modules Slots and 4-pin Slot 5 and 6 5- and 6-pin Interface relays Slots 7 and 8 - and 6-pin The slots to 8 must be marked in the circuit diagrams and at the terminal blocks. Signal lines should be laid separately from power cables to avoid the risk of interference couplings. If this is not possible, or due to the type of installation the controller may not function properly as a result of interference on the signal lines, the signal lines must be shielded. The shield must be connected to the PE conductor of the controller or one of the ground connections, depending on the fault source s reference junction terminal. The shield should only ever be connected to one side of the controller when it is connected to the PE conductor to prevent creation of a ground loop. 44 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

145 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection The SIPART DR is designed with a high electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and has a high resistance to HF interference. In order to maintain this high operational reliability we recommend that all inductances (e.g. relays, contactors, motors) installed in the vicinity of or connected to the controllers should be assembled with suitable suppressors (e.g. RC combinations)! Slot Main board AE to AE (I/U) AA bis AA BE to BE4 BA to BA8 4 V L, M Slot AE4(I/U,R,P,T,V) Slot AE5(I/U,R,P,T,V) 4Slot4 Serial interface 5 Slot 5 4BA 4 VBE BA9 to BA, BE5 to BE6 BA relay BA9, BA 5BE BE5 to BE9 AA AA7 AE AE9 to AE AABA AA7 to AA9, BE5 to BE7 6Slot6 4BA 4 VBE BA to BA6, BE to BE BA relay BA, BA4 5BE BE to BE4 AA(y-hold) AA4 AE AE6 to AE8 AABE AA4 to AA6, BE to BE 7 PE conductor contact spring 8 Grounding screw 9 Mounting rail (contained in scope of delivery of relay module 6DR848A/B) Mains voltage selection switch Mains plug Power supply unit Figure - Rear panel SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

146 Installation. Electrical Connection Manual D Connection of the serial interface For V.8 point-to-point connections of the SES, a 9-pin socket strip for round cables is available. SIPART DR 9///4 serial interface -D9 9pol. 7 4 remote system V. 8 point-to-point m 6DR8-8C Figure - Plug for serial interface 9-pin socket strip for round cables (screw terminal) Recommended cable: 4-core unshielded round cable C745-A47-D9 JE-LiYY 4xx.5 BdSi D Zero volt system The SIPART DR controllers only have a V conductor (ground, GND) on the process side which is output double at terminals / and / of the standard controller. If these GND connections are not sufficient, additional proprietary terminals can be snapped onto the DIN rail on the power pack. The controller uses a common reference for both inputs and outputs, all process signals are referred to this point. The reference line is also connected to vacant terminal modules. These may only be used if practically no current flows through this connection (see e.g. fig. -, page 5, I 4L). The power supply connection is electrically isolated from the process signals. In systems with unmeshed control circuits, the SIPART DRs need not be interconnected. In meshed control circuits the GND connections of all controllers must be fed singly to a common termination or the continuous GND rail with a large cross-section. This common termination may be connected with the system s PE conductor at one point. Since in analog signal exchange between the devices, only currents /4 to ma are used and these are evaluated as a four-pole measurement (differential amplifiers with electronic potential isolation), voltage drops on the M-conductor are not interpreted as errors (see fig. -6, page 59 to fig. -). The signal-to-noise ratio on digital signals is so great that voltage dips on the GND rail can be ignored. 46 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

147 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection.. Connection standard controller.. Connection standard controller D Power supply connection Attention: Set mains voltage selection switch (see fig. -) in no-voltage state according to the available mains voltage! 6DR-5 5/ V AC, switchable Three-pin plug IEC IV DIN 49457A 5 A slow blow per controller L N PE ~ = 4 V 5 V U REF L N PE 5 or V AC other loads on the same signal loop; use larger fuse if necessary Alternative DR 6DR-5 Figure - Connection 5/ V AC power supply 6DR-4 4V UC Special -pin plug any polarity.5 A slow blow per controller 4 V 5 V 4 V UC other loads on the same signal loop; use larger fuse if necessary = DR 6DR-4 U REF Figure -4 Connection 4 V DC power supply SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

148 Installation. Electrical Connection.. Connection standard controller Manual D AE to AE Wiring U I U H U 4L L H - U AE AE I L AE AE- AE I AE- - - L AE AE- AE AE / / / /9 / AE /4 / M M 5 Ω ) M M / Other connection possibilities, see chapter.., page 58 ) potential load impedance from additional instruments Set the analog inputs AE to AE to or 4 ma with the stucture switches S5 to S7 Figure -5 Connections AE to AE U or I Jumper settings V V I V V I V V I AE AE AE factory setting I ( to ma) Main board C745-A-D4 Figure -6 Jumper settings AE to AE 48 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

149 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection.. Connection standard controller D BE to BE4 D BA to BA8 > V or <4.5 V L BE BE BE BE4 / /5 /6 /7 /8 / /4 /5 /6 /7 /8 /9 / / / BAS M 9 V 5 ma Figure -7 BE to BE4 connection diagram Figure -8 BA to BA8 connection diagram If S-controllers are CSi* structured, the Δy-outputs of the S-controllers are permanently assigned to the digital outputs BA*. Arithmetic block Δy / terminal Δy/terminal S= and S> BA5 / /8 BA6 / /9 S> BA7 / / BA8 / / D AA to AA D L (auxiliary voltage output) / / /4 / AA /4... ma AA AA M 9 Ω / / / L M M V ma Set the analog outputs AA to AA to or 4 ma with the structure switches S69 to S7 Figure -9 AA to AA connection diagram Figure - L connection diagram SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

150 Installation. Electrical Connection.. Wiring of option modules Manual.. Wiring of option modules D 6DR8-8A AE, U or I-input Slot 5: AE9 to AE in StrS set S = 5 Slot 6: AE6 to AE8 in StrS set S = 5 Wiring I L I - 4 V L «««/ 6/6 AE8 6/5 AE8 / 5/6 AE 5/5 AE V 49.9 Ω I - V U I 4L U H U - U H I - M «««««6/4 AE7 6/ AE7 6/ AE6 6/ AE6 / 5/4 AE 5/ AE 5/ AE9 5/ AE9 / V V 49.9 Ω I - V V 49.9 Ω - # 6DR8-8A Figure - Connection of AE module 6DR8-8A Jumper settings V/V I V/V I V/V I AE8/AE AE7/AE factory setting I ( to ma) AE6/AE9 6DR8-8A Figure - AE6 to AE8 or AE9 to AE jumper settings 5 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

151 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection.. Wiring of option modules D 6DR8-8J AE, U or I-input AE4inslotinStrS S8 setto AE5inslotinStrS S9 setto Ranges: tov/v/maor.v/v/4mato V/V/mA,plusV/V using jumpers on board U U H *= or *= I 4L U M */4 */ / U H I M */4 */ */ */ / /... V /.... V x5=x6/ V x4=x5/ V /4... ma x4=x5/ V factory setting V, x4=x5 (and x7=x8) I L L / V/V x4 x5 x6 I */ Ω M */ */ */ M Ω ) / 6DR8-8J ) potential load impedance from additional instruments Further connection possibilities see chapter.., page 58 Figure - Connection U/I-module 6DR8-8J SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

152 Installation. Electrical Connection.. Wiring of option modules Manual D 6DR8-8R AE, resistance input AE4 in slot ; in StrS S8 set or AE5 in slot ; in StrS S9 set or Connection I *= or *= R for potentiometer with I s % 5mAor I s =5 ma R>kΩ 6DR8-8R 4 V U REF */4 */4 */4 U H I M R E */ RP ΔR R A - - R */ R E ΔR R A - - R */ */ 5mA Is I K S */ */ S = ma R P = R Ω R Ω S= Ω R S Ω Ω 5 Ω 5 Ω kω kω ma kω5ωω factory setting S = Ω Figure -4 Connection of R module 6DR8-8R Calibration. Set sliding switch S according to the measuring range.. Set R A using Set display or analog output (depending on the configuration) to start-of-scale value or 4 ma.. Set R E using display or analog output to full-scale value or ma. 5 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

153 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection.. Wiring of option modules D 6DR8-8V universal module for analog input The universal module can be plugged into slot (analog input AE4) and slot (analog input AE5). The measuring ranges are set using the menu CAE4/CAE5. Pin assignment for mv transmitter Direct input Umax = ±75 mv mv i m U REF R L4 R L 4 A D R L R L4 kω Sensor 6DR8-8V Block diagram of mv module 6DR8-8V Figure -5 Connection of UNI module Pin assignment measuring range for TC, internal connector 6DR85-8J for U or I V ma 4L U H ma L L perm. common mode voltage 5 V UC SMART V 4 SMART ma 89k R 8k95 5R k Measuring range for TC, internal connector 6DR85-8J L 4 M i m U REF A D Sensor 6DR8-8V Block diagram of mv module 6DR8-8V Figure -6 Connection of UNI module SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 5

154 Installation. Electrical Connection.. Wiring of option modules Manual Pin assignment for thermocouple TC External reference junction terminal Internal reference junction terminal i m U REF T b R L4 R L R L4 R L T 4 A D R L R L4 Ω Internal reference junction terminal 6DR85-8A Sensor 6DR8-8V Block diagram of mv module 6DR8-8V Figure -7 Connection of thermocouple TC Pin assignment for Pt sensor RTD 4-wire -wire -wire i m U REF R L4 R L4 R L4 4 Pt R L R L Pt R L Pt A D R L R L per Ω R L R L =R L =R L4 5 Ω R L R L R L4 5 Ω Sensor 6DR8-8V Block diagram of mv module 6DR8-8V Figure -8 Wiring of PT sensor RTD 54 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

155 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection.. Wiring of option modules Pin assignment for resistance potentiometer (R) -wire connection -wire connection i m U REF Rp R L4 R L ) R s 4 Rp R L4 4 A D R L R L4 5 Ω R L R L R L4 5 Ω Sensor R S R p R S R p.8k,rp>5kω not recommended 6DR8-8V Block diagram of UNI module 6DR8-8V ) R s jumper impedance only necessary if.8 kω <R 5kΩ Figure -9 Connection of UNI module D 6DR8-8D BA relay 5 V BA9 and BA in slot 5 in StrS set S = BA and BA4 in slot 6 in StrS set S = 5/5 6/5 K K μ R 5/4 BA 6/4 BA4 5/6 6/6 5/ 6/ K K μ R 5/ BA9 6/ BA 6DR88D 5/ 6/ AC V A VA DC V A Wat5V Wat4V Figure - Connection of BA (relay) module 6DR8-8D SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

156 Installation. Electrical Connection.. Wiring of option modules Manual D 6DR8-8E 4BA 4 V BE BA9 to BA and BE5 to BE6 in slot 5, in StrS set S = BA to BA6 and BE to BE in slot 6, in StrS set S = 5V 4V I 5/5 BA 5/4 BA 5/ BA 5/ BA9 6/5 BA6 6/4 BA5 6/ BA4 6/ BA 9 V ma 5V 4V 5/6 BE6 5/ BE5 6/6 BE 6/ BE 6DR8-8E Figure - Connection of 4BA (4 V) module 6DR8-8E D 6DR8-8C 5BE BE5 to BE9 in slot 5, in StrS set S = BEtoBE4inslot6, instrs sets= L / 4V 5V 5/5 BE9 6/5 BE4 > V or 5/4 BE8 5/ BE7 6/4 BE 6/ BE <4.5 V 5/ BE6 6/ BE 5/ BE5 6/ BE M / Figure - Wiring of 5BE module 6DR8-8C 56 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

157 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection.. Wiring of option modules D 6DR8-8A (AA, y hold ) AA7 in slot 5 in StrS set S = 4 AA4 in slot 6 in StrS set S = 4 Rxd Txd L4 U = I = AA7AA4 5/5 6/5 5/4 6/4 5/ 6/ 5/ 6/ M AA4 (y) U H /4... ma 65 Ω ) U H... V, 7 ma 5V 4 V I 5/ 6/ St 9 V ma ) UH need only be connected if the output current is to be maintained even in the event of a power failure in the controller or when removing the module for service work. ) depending on the supply up to 9 Ω possible (see chapter.6., page ). Figure - Connection of y hold module 6DR8-8A D 6DR8-8B AA BE AA7 to AA9 and BE5 to BE7 in StrS set S = 6 AA4 to AA6 and BE to BE in StrS set S = 6 Rxd Txd U U I I 5/6 AA9 5/5 AA8 6/6 AA6 6/5 AA5 U I 5/5 AA7 6/5 AA4 5V 4V I 5/ BE7 6/ BE 5/ BE6 6/ BE 5/ BE5 6/ BE Figure -4 Connection AA/BE module 6DR88B SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

158 Installation. Electrical Connection.. Alternative connection for I- and U-input Manual D 6DR84-8A (interface relay V, 4 relays) 6DR84-8B (interface relay V, relays) E.g. connection for Δy outputs in the S controller with interface relay V, relays (6DR84-8B) BA7 Δy / 7/ n 4 V 7/6 7/4 BA8 Δy / 7/ Ω n 4 V 7/5 7/9 7/7 M M / 7/ Ω 7/8 N L Figure -5 Connection of interface relay V 6DR84-8B The interface relay V, 4 relays (6DR84-8A) contains 4 relays. Terminals 8/ to 8/9 must then be connected accordingly in addition to the terminals 7/ to 7/8. Attention: Observe the max. switching voltage! (excessive increases in resonance in phase shift motors, see chapter.4., page ) AC 5 8,5 V A VA DC 5 8 V A W at 5 V Wat4V.. Alternative connection for I- and U-input D /4tomAsignals The 49.9 Ω input impedance is connected across the input signals AE and AE- (AE to AE in the standard controller and in module 6DR8-8A by means of jumper settings and by external wiring on the option module for AE4 and AE5). If the signal is still required during service work in which the terminal is disconnected, the input 49.9 Ω input impedance. % must be connected to the terminal between AE and AE. The internal 49.9 Ω resistance must then be disconnected by appropriate jumper settings or by rewiring. 58 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

159 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection.. Alternative connection for I- and U-input V/V ma 49,9 Ω AE Br I 49.9 Ω set V jumper AE - 6DR optionally Figure -6 Signal input AE to AE of the standard controller, internal or external 49.9 Ω resistance or signal input AE6 to AE8 via module AE, 6DR8-8A V/V ma ma AE AE 49.9 Ω 49.9 Ω AE - AE - set V jumper optionally 6DR8-8J Figure -7 Signal input AE4, AE5 via option module 6DR8-8J, internal or external 49.9 Ω resistance U H /4tomA AE I AE M 49.9 Ω Figure -8 Connection of a /4 to ma transmitter /4 to ma with potential isolation SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

160 Installation. Electrical Connection.. Alternative connection for I- and U-input Manual U H I /4tomA AE AE 49.9 Ω M Figure -9 Connection of a /4 to ma transmitter with negative polarity to ground -U H AE /4tomA AE 49.9 Ω I M Figure - Connection of a /4 to ma -wire transmitter /4 to ma with positive polarity to ground L I 4tomA AE AE 49.9 Ω M Figure - Connection of a 4 to ma -wire transmitter supplied from controller s L 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

161 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection.. Alternative connection for I- and U-input L I 4tomA AE AE M 49.9 Ω instrument AE AE M 49.9 Ω instrument Figure - Connection of a 4 to ma -wire transmitter to two instruments in series supplied by L from one of the instruments Every input amplifier is supplied by a differential voltage of. to V. Instrument also has a. to V common-mode voltage that is suppressed in this case. Several instruments with a total common-mode voltage of up to V can be connected in series. As the last instrument s input is connected to ground, its input impedance is referred to ground. As there will be an increased impedance (maximum permissible common-mode voltage V), the permissible impedance voltage of the transmitter or the on-load voltage may not be exceeded! D Voltages /. to V or / to V U H U AE AE M Figure - Connection of a floating voltage supply SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 6

162 Installation. Electrical Connection.. Alternative connection for I- and U-input Manual U H AE U AE M Figure -4 Single-pin connection of a non-floating voltage supply with negative polarity to ground U H AE AE only permitted when connected for V U M Figure -5 Single-pin connection of a non-floating voltage supply with positive polarity to ground Figure -4 and Figure -5: The voltage dip on the ground rail between the voltage source and the input amplifier appears as a measuring error. Only use when ground cables are short or choose a circuit configuration as shown in figure -6! U H U AE AE M Figure -6 Double-pin wiring of a voltage source with negative polarity to ground 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

163 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection..4 Connection of the interface L U AE AE Instrument M AE AE Instrument M Figure -7 Parallel wiring of a non-floating voltage source to two instruments. The voltage source is supplied by L of one of the instruments and negative is referred to ground. Figure -6 and Figure -7: The voltage dip on the ground rail between the voltage source and the input amplifier appears as a common mode voltage and is suppressed...4 Connection of the interface D Connection of the interface module 6DR8-8C RS point-to-point Canbeinsertedinslot4 RS point-to-point SIPART BUS 4/ 4/ Controller Rxd Txd Remote system RS 485 RS R 4/7 Reference 5 4/8 Figure -8 Setting on the SES module 6DR8-8C with RS point-to-point SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4 6

164 Installation. Electrical Connection..4 Connection of the interface Manual RS 485 bus Canbeinsertedinslot4 RS 485 RS R RS point-to-point SIPART BUS Figure -9 Jumper settings serial interface module 6DR8-8C in RS 485 bus SES Instrument 8 Rxd/Txd-A RS 485 Bus m Rxd/Txd-A Jumper setting RS 485 Rxd/Txd-B Rxd/Txd-B SES 8 Rxd/Txd-A Remote system Instrument to Rxd/Txd-B Note line termination: The RS 485 bus must be terminated with its characteristic impedance. To do this, the terminating resistor in the last bus user is switched by plugging the coding bridge appropriately. SES Instrum. 8 Rxd/Txd-A Jumper setting RS485 5R Rxd/Txd-B 9-pin bus plug for round cable C745-A47-D9 Figure -4 RS 485 bus connection diagram 64 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

165 Manual Installation. Electrical Connection..4 Connection of the interface D Connecting the interface PROFIBUS-DP, 6DR8-8P Connection Canbeinsertedinslot4 PROFIBUS plug Instrument (Slave) PROFIBUSmodule RxD/TxD-P VP DGND 6 5 9R 9R R ON B A A 6ES797- to RxD/TxD-N 8 B Instrument n (Slave) PROFIBUSmodule RxD/TxD-P VP DGND 6 5 9R 9R R OFF B A RxD/TxD-N 8 A B Master RxD/TxD-A RxD/TxD-B max. number of instruments, without repeater: max. number of bus users (Slave Master): 6 Figure -4 Principle diagram SIPART DR via PROFIBUS-DP and bus plug to Master Note line termination: The RS 485 bus must be terminated with a characteristic impedance. To do this, the switch in the bus connector must be switched ON in the first and last bus users. The switch may not be ON in any of the other bus users. A detailed description and notes on cable laying and bus cable laying can be found in the user s guide Decentral Peripheral System ET. Order number 6ES5 998-ES. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C

166 Installation. Electrical Connection..4 Connection of the interface Manual 66 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-4

167 Manual Operation. Process operation Operation The SIPART DR is operated exclusively and fully with the operating keys on the front module. The function of the operating panel can be switched between three main levels: Process operation level Selection level Configuring level (structuring and parameterization modes) Some of the keys and displays on the front module are assigned different control and display functions when the operating mode is changed. See the description of the respective main level for details.. Process operation The operation of the SIPART DR in process mode requires no detailed explanation due to the design and colour scheme of the operating panel, the control elements and the labeling. (Fig. -): Red is the color of the actual value: The four-digit red digital display (6) and the red vertical LED bargraph (7) display the actual value. Green is the color of the setpoint: The four-digit green digital display (9) and the green LED bargraph (8) display the setpoint. The green Internal/External key () is used to switch between the internal and external setpoint, the internal setpoint is set with the green w-adjusting keys (6). The green internal LED () signals operation with the internal setpoint, the C-LED () also lights green when there is no CB control signal. Yellow is the color of the manipulated variable: The yellow H/A key is used to switch between manual and automatic operation. The yellow manual LED (8) signals by lighting steadily or flashing that manual operation has been activated. Lighting up of the yellow y-external LED () signals an external intervention in the manipulated variable, i.e. a follow-up (DDC), safety or blocking operation. The manipulated variable generally displayed in the yellow digital display (4) can be adjusted with the yellow y-keys () in manual operation. The yellow y-leds (5) indicate the output of the adjusting increments in all operating modes of the S-controller. The alarm LEDs (5) and (7) signal exceeding or dropping below of the limit values. The adaptation LED (4) signals the progress of the parameter optimization during the adaptation process by lighting steadily or flashing. The displays and setpoint keys in the double controllers are switched over by the Shift key () with which the displays can also be switched to different signal levels in single controllers. The corresponding controller LEDs () signal the switching state. The measuring point label () is exchangeable. To change it, open the plexiglass cover with a pointed tool in the center and take out the label. Behind it a screw is revealed which can be used to separate the front module from the controller (see chapter 5, page 7 Maintenance ). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-67

168 Operation. Process operation Manual SIPART DR C Int ST 8 A A SPW 6 A A4 4 I II OUT-Y SIEMENS SIPART DR Internal LED (green) ON: Internal setpoint Internal-/External-key Switch setpoint or Exitkey when configuring C-LED (green) ON: no computer standby or Exit LED when configuring 4 Adaptation LED (yellow) OFF: Adaptation prepared Flashing: Adaptation in progress ON: Adaptation ended 5. A-LED (red) Response of limit value A 5. A-LED (red) Response of limit value A 6. Δw-key 6. Δw-key Adjusting keys internal setpoint 7. A-LED (red) Response of limit value A 7. A4-LED (red) Response of limit value A4 8 Manual-LED (yellow) ON: Manual operation internal Flashing: Manual operation external 9 H/A-key Shift Manual-/Automaticoperation or Enter key when configuring y-external LED (yellow) External y-intervention or Enter-LED in configuring. Controller I-LED (green) Operation/Display level controller I. Controller II-LED (green) Operation/Display level controller II Flashing: Display and active functions are not identical ON: Display and active functions are identical Shift key Switch Operation and Display level controlleri /controller II. Δy-key Adjusting keys manual manipulated. - Δy-key variable 4 Digital display (yellow) for the manipulated variable y 5. Δy-LED (yellow) Display of the Δy adjusting increments in the S-controller 5. Δy-LED (yellow) Display of the -Δy adjusting increments in the S-controller 6 Digital display (red) for the controlled variable x 7 Analog display (red) for the controlled variable x 8 Analog display (green) for the setpoint w 9 Digital display (green) for the setpoint w Exchangeable measuring point label, behind it screw for removing the front module Figure - Control and display elements in the process operation 68 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

169 Manual Operation. Selection level. Selection level You enter the selection level for the various configuring menus by pressing the Shift key () for longer (approx. 5 s) until PS flashes in the y-display. Condition: Digital signal Block-Operate blb = and Block-Parameterize, Structure blps = The controller operates in online mode in the selection level, i.e. its last operating mode is retained, the current process variables can be traced on the analog displays (), (). The configuring menus can be selected with the W-keys. If none of these menus is called with the Enter key (9) within about s ( enter the configuring level), the controller automatically returns to the process operation level. (onpa) 9 AdAP only at S58 StrU only at bls = or no, if blps= SIPART DR C ST Int 4 Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: current status Return to process operation level flashes off Command variable w A A A SPW 6. Adjustment onpa-adap-stru A4 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key : current status jump to parameterization mode onpa-adap or in structuring preselection level to ofpa Controlled variable x PS (Parameterization/ structuring) 6 4 I II OUT-Y Enter LED: Shift key : Controller LEDs: flashes Continuous pressing switches process display to unsignaled controller steady or flashing light signals displayed controller SIEMENS SIPART DR.. no function Figure - Control and display elements in the selection level SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-69

170 Operation. Selection level Manual Operating and Monitoring When blb = only the display level canbeswitched Process operation level see chapter., pg. 67 Exit key () blps = Shift key () (up to approx. 5 s) to blb = or blps = ) PS in the y- display flashes blb or blps in the w-display, PS in the y-display flashes onpa w-key (6) AdAP, only appears in S58 w-key (6) Enter key (9) Exit key () Enter key (9) Exit key () Online parameters, see chapter.., pg. 7 Adaptation, see chapter.., pg. 75 Parameterization modes w-key (6) only when bls = Figure - Selection level 7 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

171 Manual Operation. Selection level ofpa PASt StrS FdEF FCon FPos w-keys (6) w-keys (6) w-keys (6) w-keys (6) This part only appears when S4 = w-keys (6) w-keys (6) Enter key (9) Exit key () Enter key (9) Exit key () Enter key (9) (5 s) Exit key () Enter key (9) Exit key () Enter key (9) Exit key () Enter key (9) Exit key () Structuring modes Offline parameters, see chapter..4, pg. 8 Parameter control see chapter..5, pg. 84 Structure switches see chapter..6, pg. 86 Define functions, see chapter..7, pg. Wire functions, see chapter..8, pg. Position functions, see chapter..9, pg. 5 w-keys (6) w-keys (6) APSt w-keys (6) Enter key (9) Exit key () All Preset (whole controller to factory setting), see chapter.., pg. CAE4 w-keys (6) only appears when: S8 > Enter key (9) Exit key () Signal selection, see chapter.., pg. CAE5 only appears when: S9 > Enter key (9) Exit key () Signal selection, see chapter.., pg. Fig. - (continued) Selection level SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-7

172 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Paramterization Manual. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Paramterization Parameterization including the selection level takes place online, i.e. the controller continues operating in its last operating mode. The analog x-display (7) and W-display (8) still displays the process image so that the reaction of the controlled system to parameter changes can be read off directly. The Internal LED () and Manual LED (8) and the Alarm LEDs A to A4 indicate the current operating state. The Internal/External key () becomes the Exit key, the corresponding C-LED () indicates ready to exit, i.e. whenever the LED flashes, pressing the Exit key returns from the selected level to the higher level in the hierarchy. The w-keys (6) serve to adjust the variables displayed in the digital w-display (mode name or parameter value). The Automatic/Manual key (9) becomes the Enter key, the corresponding y-external LED () indicates ready to enter, i.e. whenever the LED flashes, pressing the Enter key causes a jump down to the next level in the hierarchy. The digital x-display still indicates the controlled variable x except in mode AdAP (see chapter.., page 75). The y-keys () serve to adjust the parameter name displayed in the y-display. In double controllers the remaining process displays can still be switched over to the controllers not selected in the process operation level with the Shift key () but now only for as long as the Shift key () is pressed. The extension of the switch over cycle by A to A4 which may have been selected with S98 is suppressed. The discrepancy signaling by the controller I /controller II LEDs () is not changed with this switchover. Therefore the controller with the unlit controller LED (steady or flashing light) is always displayed whilst the Shift key is pressed. The parameters with a large numeric range can be adjusted rapidly in the parameterization modes onpa and AdAP. First select the adjustment direction with one w-key and then switch on the rapid action by simultaneously pressing the other w-key. If the control signal blps =, parameterization and structuring is blocked, no PS (w and y-indicators) appears when you press the Shift key. If the control signal bls =, structuring is blocked, ofpa to CAE5 are hidden in the parameterization preselection level. 7 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

173 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Parameterization mode onpa (online parameters).. Parameterization mode onpa (online parameters) The parameters which have a directly visible effect on the process when they are adjusted are arranged in the parameterization mode onpa. The other parameters are arranged in the structuring mode ofpa. Parameter value 9 SIPART DR C ST Int 4 Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: current status Return to the parameterization preselection level after onpa flashes off Command variable w A A A SPW Adjustment of parameter value with rapid action 7 4 A4 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key: current status no function Controlled variable x Parameter name tfi, vvi... P9, P flashing 6 4 I II OUT-Y Enter LED: Shift key : Controller LEDs: off Continuous pressing switches process display to unsignaled controller steady or flashing light signals displayed controller SIEMENS SIPART DR.. Adjustment of parameter name Figure -4 Control and display elements in the parameterization mode onpa SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-7

174 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Parameterization mode onpa (online parameters) Manual Digital display y x w Adjustment/ display area Factory setting Resolution Di- mension Parameter meaning tfi vvi cpi tni tvi AHI YI YAI ) YEI ) tfii vvii cpii tnii tvii AHII YII YAII ) YEII ) dr ty ta te tyii taii teii tf tfb c c c c4 c5 c6 c7 c8 c9 Contro rolled variable x off, to. to,. to., to 9984 off,. to,99. to. Auto,. to.. to.. to. off, to,. to.. to.. to 9984 off,., to,99. to. Auto,. to.. to.. to..8 to 8. ) off, to to 6 to 6 off, to, to 6 to 6 off,. to off,. to to to to to to to to to to off. Auto off. Auto 5 5,,,8 off off 8 values/octave 8 values/octave values/octave 8 values/octave values/octave 8 values/octave 8 values/octave 8 values/octave s s s % % % % s s s % % % % s s ms ms s ms ms s s % % % Filter time constant xdi Derivative action gain Proportional action factor Integral action time Derivative action time Parameter set I Response threshold xdi Operating point P-controller Manipulated variable limiting start Manipulated variable limiting end Filter time constant xdii Derivative action gain Proportional action factor Integral action time Derivative action time Parameter set II Response threshold xdii Operating point P-controller Manipulated variable limiting start Manipulated variable limiting end Display refresh rate Floating time min. actuating pulse pause min. actuating pulse length Floating time Controller II min. actuating pulse pause when S = min. actuating pulse length Filter time constant AE Filter time constant AEb Multiplicative constant Multiplicative constant Additive constant Multiplicative constant Additive constant Multiplicative constant Multiplicative constant Additive constant Multiplicative constant P to connectable parameters only when S4 = P to connectable parameters ) YE >YA ) typical cycle times Table - Parameter list onpa 74 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

175 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation).. Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation) This mode only appears in the parameterization preselection level when S58 (with adaptation). The Enter function into the parameterization mode AdAP is only possible when the controller is in manual operation (when adapting the master controller in cascades (S = 5/6) only in internal and automatic operation of the master controller). In the parameterization mode AdAP, the controller influences the process online (but in manual operation). In double controllers (cascade, ratio cascade and override controllers), adaptation is always made to the controller selected by the Shift key () in the process operation level. The remaining process displays can still be switched over to the controllers not selected in the process operation level with the Shift key () but only for as long as the Shift key () is pressed. Steady or flashing lights in the controller I/controller II LEDs signal the adapted controller. In override controllers (S = 7/8) the flashing controller LED signals that the other controller would be active in automatic operation. The parameterization mode AdAP has 4 different states: Pre adaptation During adaptation Aborted adaptation Post adaptation The digital display and the keys are assigned different functions in the individual states which are integrated smoothly in the operating concept of the controller. In pre- and post-adaptation the digital displays and the keys are used for the parameter display and -setting as is the case in the parameterization mode and structuring mode onpa or ofpa (see figure -6, page 79). The complete process image as described in chapter., page 67 is displayed during adaptation (see figure -7, page 79). In the case of aborted adaptation the error message flashes in the digital x- and w-displays. The error messages are acknowledged with the Enter key (9) (see figure -7). D Pre adaptation The adaption LED (4) is off and indicates readiness for adaptation. First the parameters for the presettings (tu, dpv, dy) are displayed. They must be set according to the desired step signal. Then the old parameters **.o with the ID Pi or Pid with their value and the new parameters **.n with the ID Strt AdAP appear on the displays. If there is parameter control (S59 ) PAST is displayed as a note in place of the value when **.o. The old and the new parameters are not adjustable. The adaptation can only be started with the Enter key (9) when the new parameters **.n are selected with the display Strt AdAP (manual operation is a prerequisite). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-75

176 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation) Manual D During adaptation The adaption LED (4) flashes indicating that the adaptation is in progress. The process can be monitored over the whole process display. D Aborted adaptation The adaptation LED (4) is off indicating readiness for adaptation after error acknowledgement. The current adaptation can be aborted manually or automatically by the error monitor. Manual abortion can be activated in the event of danger by pressing the Exit key (). The program then jumps to the parameterization preselection level after AdAP. From there you can return to the process operation level by pressing the Exit key () again. The controller is in manual operation and the manual manipulated variable can be adjusted. Automatic aborting is effected by the error monitors. The error messages are displayed on the digital x- and w-displays. The error message is acknowledged by pressing the Enter key (9), the parameterization mode AdAP is retained, tu is displayed, the presettings can be corrected if necessary. The adaptation is aborted by the signals N (DDC), Si and ybl. Abortion by the SES control signals N ES (DDC), Si ES, ybl ES can be prevented by Internal operation. D Post adaptation The adaption LED (4) is on indicating the end of adaptation. The parameters **.o with the ID Pi or Pid and the new parameters **.n with the ID Pi. to 8 and Pid. to 8 for Pi and Pid controller design are offered. The digits after the Pi or Pid ID indicate the determined line order. If there is parameter control (S59 ) the old parameters **.o are displayed with PAST instead of the parameter value. The old and new parameters are adjustable but the new parameters only if there is no parameter control. On pressing the Exit key the parameters **.o or **.n just selected are transferred when returning to AdAP in the parameter preselection level. The LED (4) is now off. When transfering **.o, these parameters remain unchanged if they have not been changed manually. When transfering **.n the old parameters are overwritten by the new parameters. The new parameters are deleted, i.e. after jumping back to the parameterization mode AdAP, the **.n parameters are identified by Strt AdAP. The transfered parameters do not affect the process until the process operation level has switched to Automatic after pressing the Exit key (). When the Exit key () is pressed with parameter control ( **.o PAST) and selection of **.n, the error message no AUto appears (see fig. -5, page 78). It indicates that no automatic transfer is possible, the **.n parameters and the controlling variable SG must be noted down (see chapter.5.5, page 96 Adaptation ). 76 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

177 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation) D Adaptation error messages Error message digital x/w display Explanation not StAt not stable at % tu after start of adaptation wait and restart adaptation x, y y %tu - no afterexpiryoftytheystep Check position feedback and drive of the final dy in the S-controller is not executed correctly control element Y y outside the measuring span of to % ofl y Manual y too big or too small ALL step response in wrong direction within PASS % tu x, y y Change active direction of the controller control loop undershoot (all pass loop), all-pass loops not defined among %tu loop models - too SMAL x after 5 % tu still within starting band tu too short y step too small x, y - 5 y %tu no scale at 67 % tu full scale value not reached yet full tu too short loop cannot reach full scale value, e.g. integrally active line transient recovery time t 95 > h x, y y Pv x outside the measuring span to % ofl too because of too small a line time constant no FASt sufficiently accurate adaptation not possible - 67 y Manual y too big or too small (transient recovery time t 95 <5s) %tu over Shot > % overshoot of the transient function sufficiently accurate adaptation not possible x, y y n.ddc Followup or DCC-mode ModE via the control signals Si safety operation via the control signals ModE YbL direction-dependent blocking operation via the ModE control signals HE Manual external operation by the control signals ModE - cancel mode of operation 67 %tu Table - Adaptation error messages SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-77

178 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation) Manual Process operation level, see chapt.., pg. 67 if nec. controller selection controller I or controller II, Switch controller to manual mode, set the desired operating point and wait for stationary condition! Filters tfi, tfii andtftotfb and floating time ty must be set! In the S-controller ta, te and ty must be set! see fig. -, page 7 Selection level AdAP Adaptation after process operation Repeat adaptation Enter key (9) ) Exit key () Pre-adaptation Presettings Adaptation LED (4) OFF tu off,.to4h Monitoring time dpv neg, PoS Direction of the step Amplitude trigger dy.5to9% **.o Pi or Pid **.n Strt AdAP Enter key (9) Parameterization mode AdAP Startofadaptation Enter key (9) During adaptation Adaptation LED (4) flashing Complete process display aborted adaptation Adaptation LED (4) OFF Switch controller to automatic operation, old parameters **.o are active Exit key () Old parameters **.o are retained Exit key () Exit key () Error message display by error messages manual of the adap- via tation Exit key procedure see table -, pg. 77 Post adaptation Adaptation LED (4) ON cp.o Pi or Pid Exit key () AH.o y Keys (9 old parameters Switch controller to automatic operation, new parameters **.n are active Exit key () Old parameters **.o are overwritten by new parameters **.n ) Exit key () ) cp.n cp.n AH.n Pi.* Pid.* new parameters Figure -5 Parameterization mode AdAP * loop order to 8 ** parameter name ) Enter function only active in manual operation (in the case of adaptation of the master controller in cascades (S = 5/6) master controller set to Internal and Automatic) ) Error message no AUto If new parameters are selected and there is parameter control, the flashing error message no AUto appears after pressing the Exit key (no automatic transfer). Press the Enter key: Error is acknowledged; return to parameterization mode AdAP; the parameters won by adaptation can be noted. Pressing the Exit key: Jump to the parameterization preselection mode AdAP; the new parameters **.n are deleted. On jumping to the parameterization mode AdAP, Strt AdAP appears in **.n. 78 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

179 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation) Pre adaptation **.o value or PAST **.n Strt after adaptation **.o value or PAST **.n value 9 Command variable w 8 SIPART DR C ST 8 A A 6 A Int SPW 4 6. Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: pre-adaptation: post adaptation: 6. current status Return to AdAP in parameterization preselection level flashes pre-adaptation: off (adaptation readiness) Post adaptation: On (adaptation ended) no function adjustment of parameter value Controlled variable x Pre adaptation **.o Pi or Pid **.n AdAP after adaptation **. o Pi or Pid **.n Pi.* and Pid.* Parameter name tu,dpv,d,y,sg, vv.o, vv.n... AH.o, AH.n * = Loop orderto8 ** = Parameter name A4 4 I II OUT-Y SIEMENS SIPART DR.. Adjustment of parameter name 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key: Enter key: Shift key : Controller LEDs: ON (manual operation) pre-adaptation : Start adaptation Post adaptation: no function Pre adaptation: flashes, only for **.n; Post adaptation: off Continuous pressing switches process display to the unadapted controller steady or flashing light signals adapted controller Figure -6 Control and display elements in pre- and post adaptation in the parameterization mode AdAP during adaptation 9 Command variable w after abortion Error messages Command variable w 8 SIPART DR C ST 8 A A 6 A Int SPW Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: no function current status manual abortion of adaptation, Return to the parameterization preselection level AdAP flashes during adaptation: flashes after abortion: off Controlled variable x 7 during adaptation 6 Controlled variable x after abortion Error messages 4 Manual manipulated variable y H SIEMENS A4 4 I II OUT-Y SIPART DR 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key : Enter LED Shift key : Controller LEDs: ON (manual operation) during adaptation: no function after abortion : error acknowledgement during adaptation: dark after abortion: flashes Continuous pressing switches the process display to the unadapted controller Steady or flashing light signals adapted controller Figure -7.. no function Control and display elements during adaptation and at aborted adaptation in the parameterization mode AdAP SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-79

180 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation) Manual Pre adaptation Digital display y x w Adjustment/ display area tu dpv dy vv.o Factory Resolu- Di- setting tion mension Controlled variable x Pi or Pid off, neg, PoS ) or PASt ) off PoS values per octave h - % Parameter meaning Monitoring time Direction of step response Amplitude of step response vv.n AdAP Strt ) Start adaptation cp.o Pi or. -. ) Pid or PASt ). 8 values per octave Presettings for the adaptation previous derivative action gain at: Tv = off Tv off previous derivative action gain parameter-controlled previous proportional action factor at: cp.n AdAP Strt ) Start adaptation tn.o Pi or ) Pid or PASt ) values per octave tn.n AdAP Strt ) Start adaptation tv.o Pi or Pid off ) ) or PASt ) off 8 values per octave Tv = off Tv off previous proportional action factor parametercontrolled s previous integral action time at: Tv = off Tv off previous integral action time parameter-controlled s previous derivative action time at: Tv = off Tv off previous derivative action time parameter -controlled tv.n AdAP Strt ) Start adaptation AH.o dark. -. ) or PASt ).. % previous response threshold previous response threshold parameter-controlled AH.n AdAP Strt ) Start adaptation ) not adjustable Table - Parameter list AdAP 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

181 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation) Post adaptation Digital display y x w Adjustment/ display area Factory Resolu- Di- setting tion mension Parameter meaning SG dark.5-5. ) - - % Controlling variable for parameter control vv.o vv.n cp.o cp.n cp.n tn.o tn.n tn.n tv.o Pi or Pid Pid.* Pid.* Pi or Pid Pi.* Pid.* Pi or Pid Pi.* Pid.* Pi or Pid.. or PASt ) 5. 8 values per octave values per octave. -. or PASt ). -. ). -. ) or PASt ). 8 values per octave 8 values per octave values per octave ) ) - 8 values per octave off or PASt ) off 8 values per octave tv.n Pid.* ) - 8 values per octave previous derivative action gain at: Tv = off Tv off previous derivative action gain parameter-controlled new derivative action gain for PID controller previous proportional action factor at: Tv = off Tv off previous proportional action factor parameter-controlled new proportional action factorfor PI controller PID controller s previous integral action time at: Tv = off Tv off s s previous integral action time parameter-comtrolled new integral action time for PI controller PID controller s previous derivative action time at: Tv = off Tv off previous derivative action time parameter-controlled s new derivative action time for PID controller AH.o dark. -. or PASt ).. % previous response threshold previous response threshold parameter-controlled AH.n dark. -. ) -. % new response threshold * identification loop order to 8 SG means: controlling variable for the parameter control ) not adjustable ) only adjustable if there is no parameter control Table Parameter list AdAP (continued) SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-8

182 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..4 Structuring mode ofpa (offline Parameters) Manual..4 Structuring mode ofpa (offline Parameters) Parameter value 9 SIPART DR C ST Int 4 Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: current status Return to ofpa in structuring preselection level flashes off Striped pattern ID offline A A A SPW 6. Adjustment of parameter value with rapid action 6. Controlled variable x 7 4 A4 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key: ON (manual operation) no function dark for S4= or at S4= function block to which 6 the parameter belongs 4 Parameter name flashing dpi...te I II OUT-Y Enter LED Shift key : Controller LEDs: off Continuous pressing switches the process display to unsignaled controller Steady or flashing light signals displayed controller SIEMENS SIPART DR.. Adjustment of parameter name Figure -8 Control and display elements in the structuring mode ofpa S and 6 5to9 and S94, S95 S67, S assigned to Display format Resolution xdi xi wi jxdij xdi xi wi jxdij xv wv xdii xii wii jxdiij according to dai to dei -999 to 9999 % % % according to dai to dei -999 to 9999 according to daii to deii -999 to 9999 digit, % digit digit to 8 # 7 y # FE %, % Table -4 Parameter range and resolution for the alarms A to A4 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

183 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..4 Structuring mode ofpa (offline Parameters) Digital display y x w Adjustment/ display area dpi dai dei dpii daii deii A A A A4 H. H.4 SA SE SH Sb ts va ve ys y y PA PE ta TE SAII SEII dark FU FU FU FU FU FU FU FU re re re re.- to,999 to 9,999,999 to 9,999.- to -,999 to 9,999 -,999 to 9,999 to% referenced to de da seetable-4. to.. to. to % referenced to de da seetable-6 off,. to to to to.. to.. to. to % referenced to de da or 99.9 to 99.9 % see table 6, page to to to to to to to to to.. to to.. to to % referenced to deii daii off Resolution digit digit digit digit digit or. %.. digit or. %..... digit or. % /.../. digit or. % Fac- tory setting Di- mension % % min % % % % % % % % % % % Parameter meaning Decimal point display I Start value Display range Full scale value } Display I Decimal point display II Start value Display range Full scale value Display II Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm 4 Hysteresis alarms A and A Hysteresis alarms A and A4 Setpoint limit start Setpoint limit end Safety setpoint Limit setpoint for override control Setpoint ramp Ratio factor start Ratio factor end Safety manipulated variable Manipulated variable range y Manipulated variable range y } Linearized FE vertex value at % Linearized FE vertex value at % Linearized FE vertex value at % Linearized FE vertex value at % Linearized FE vertex value at % Linearized FE vertex value at % Linearized FE vertex value at % Linearized FE vertex value at % } at Split range Function transmitter vertex value at % Function transmitter vertex value at % Function transmitter vertex value at % Function transmitter vertex value at % Function transmitter vertex value at % Function transmitter vertex value at % Function transmitter vertex value at % Function transmitter vertex value at % Correction quotient pressure start Correction quotient pressure end Correction quotient temperature start Correction quotient temperature end Setpoint limit start Controller II Setpoint limit end } when S = only when S4= and S or S only when S4= and FU or FU=YE S only when S4= tsii off,. to 9984 off min Setpoint ramp Controller II when S= YSII. to... % Safety manipulated variable Controller II when S= Pd Ad Ed H H4 y y4 dark.- to 999 to to to.. to.. to.. to digit digit.... % % % % display range ratio controller Hysteresis alarms A at S67 Hysteresis alarms A4 at S68 Manipulated variable range y Split range controller II Manipulated variable range y4 } at S = Table -5 Parameter list ofpa SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-8

184 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..5 Structuring mode PASt (parameter control) Manual S. to.. to. SA, SE, SH Sb Parameter range reference to de* da* = % Resolution d*i d*i % d*ii % d*i d*i d*i d*i d*i d*i d*i % d*i % d*ii d*ii d*i d*i d*ii d*i d*i d*ii d*ii d*i d*i - d*i d*i d*i d*ii d*ii -to% -to% to 99.9 % -to% to 99.9 % -to% -to% digit digit. % digit. % digit digit Table -6 Parameter range and resolution for the display format dependent parameters..5 Structuring mode PASt (parameter control) Parameter value or error message tv/y 9 SIPART DR C ST Int 4 Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: current status Return to PASt in structuring preselection level flashing also in case of error messages off Striped pattern ID offline A A A SPW Adjustment of parameter value with rapid action Controlled variable x Controlled variable x or error message Err Parameter name flashing vvc, cp...y SIEMENS A4 4 I II OUT-Y SIPART DR 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key : Enter LED Shift key : Controller LEDs: ON (manual operation) Jump to structuring mode PASt, correct error flashes in case of error message Continuous pressing switches the process display to unsignaled controller Steady or flashing light signals displayed controller.. Adjustment of parameter name Figure -9 Control and display elements in the structuring mode PASt 84 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

185 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..5 Structuring mode PASt (parameter control) Digital display y x w Adjustment/ display area Factory setting Resolution vvc values/ octave cp cp cp5 cp7 cp9 tn tn tn5 tn7 tn9 tv tv tv5 tv7 tv9 AH AH AH5 AH7 AH9 Y Y Y5 Y7 Y9 Controlled varia iable x off, 99.. Auto, ,984 9,984 9,984 9,984 9,984 off off off off off SG means: controlling variable for the parameter control 8 values/ octave 8 values/ octave 8 values/ octave.. Dimen- sion Parameter meaning Derivative action gain s s s s s s s s s s % % % % % % % % % % Proportional action factor at SG = % Proportional action factor at SG = % Proportional action factor at SG = 5 % Proportional action factor at SG = 7 % Proportional action factor at SG = 9 % Integral action time at SG = % Integral action time at SG = % Integral action time at SG = 5 % Integral action time at SG = 7 % Integral action time at SG = 9 % Derivative action time at SG = % Derivative action time at SG = % Derivative action time at SG = 5 % Derivative action time at SG = 7 % Derivative action time at SG = 9 % Response threshold at SG = % Response threshold at SG = % Response threshold at SG = 5 % Response threshold at SG = 7 % Response threshold at SG = 9 % Operating point P-Reg. at SG = % Operating point P-Reg. at SG = % Operating point P-Reg. at SG = 5 % Operating point P-Reg. at SG = 7 % Operating point P-Reg. at SG = 9 % Table -7 Parameter list PASt Error messages - tv Err: If tv. to tv.9 have not been set all = off or have not been set all off, the error message tv Err appears when returning to the structuring preselection mode after PASt with the Exit key. Pressing the Enter key: Error correction possibility by jumping to tv. in the structuring mode PASt. Pressing the Exit key: Error message is acknowledged, return to the structuring preselection level after PASt, tv. to tv.5 are automatically set to off. - Y Err: If Y. to Y.9 have not been set all = AUto or have not been set all AUto, the error message Y Err appears on returning to the structuring preselection level after PASt with the Exit key. Pressing the Enter key: Error correction possibility by jumping to the structuring mode PASt after Y.. Pressing the Exit key: Error message is acknowledged, return to the strucuring preselection level after PASt, Y. to Y. are automatically set to AUto. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-85

186 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Manual..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Structure switch position 9 SIPART DR Internal LED: Exit key : current status Return to structuring preselection level after StrS C ST Int 4 Exit LED: Adaptation LED: flashes off Striped pattern ID offline A A A SPW 6. Adjustment of structure switch position 6. A4 4 Controlled variable x Manual LED: Enter key: Enter LED: ON (manual operation) no function off Controlled variable x Structure switch number flashing to 7 to I II OUT-Y Shift key : Controller LEDs: Continuous pressing switches the process display to unsignaled controller steady or flashing light signals displayed controller SIEMENS SIPART DR.. Adjustment of structure switch number with rapid action Figure - Control and display elements in the structuring mode StrS 86 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

187 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Structure switches S Switch position [ ] ) 54 Function Identification of the user program memorys Identification for factory setting (APSt) ID number for various user programs Basic settings S [ ] Controller type Fixed setpoint controller independent setpoints Fixed setpoint controller dependent setpoints DDC fixed setpoint controller Follow-up/Synchronized/SPC controller with Int/Ext switching ratio controller cascade control ratio-cascade control override control max. selection y override control min. selection y Process display Fixed setpoint controller with setpoint (control system coupling) Follow-up controller without Int/Ext switching (control system coupling) Double fixed setpoint/follow-up controller S [ ] Output structure K-output S-output internal feedback S-output external feedback Analog inputs S S4 [ ] [ ] Mains frequency suppression 5 Hz 6 Hz Connection of input range fixed connection free connection S5 [ ] Input signal AE...mA...mA 4...mA without} 4...mA with transmitter monitoring MUF S6 [ ] Input signal AE...mA...mA 4...mA without} 4...mA with transmitter monitoring MUF [ ] factory setting ) Position cannot be set manually. As soon as the factory setting is changed (parameters or structures) S is automatically set from to, APSt sets S to, FPSt has no influence. Table -8 Structure switch tables SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-87

188 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Manual Structure switches Analog inputs Analog inputs (only active when S4 S7 S8 S9 S S S S S4 S5 Switch position [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Function Input signal AE...mA...mA 4...mA without} 4...mA with transmitter monitoring MUF Input signal AE4...mA oru,r withoutmuf...ma oru,r with MUF 4...mA withoutmuf 4...mA with MUF Uni without MUF ( % in open circuit) Uni without MUF ( % in open circ.) Uni with MUF ( % in open circuit) Uni with MUF ( % in open circuit) Input signal AE5...mA oru,r withoutmuf...ma oru,r with MUF 4...mA withoutmuf 4...mA with MUF Uni without MUF ( % in open circuit) Uni without MUF ( % in open circ.) Uni with MUF ( % in open circuit) Uni with MUF ( % in open circuit) Root extraction AE no yes Root extraction AE no yes Root extraction AE no yes Root extraction AE4 no yes Root extraction AE5 no yes Assignment FE to AE to AE % AEA AE4A AE5A AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA AEA AEA Structure switches Analo og inputs (only active when S4 = ) S6 S7 S8 S9 Switch position [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Function Assignment FE to AE to AE (AEb) % AEA AE4A AE5A AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA AEA AEA Assignment FE to AE to AE (AEb) % AEA AE4A AE5A AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA AEA AEA Assignment FE4 to AE to AE (AEb) % AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A AE6A AEbA Assignment FE5/6 to AE to AE *) (AEb) % AEA AEA AEA AE5A AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA AE4A *) Effect as FE5/FE6 depending on S = / S =, (see fig. -5, page 4) [ ] factory setting 88 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

189 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Structure switches S S Switch position [ ] [ ] Function Linearization FE no yes Linearization FE no yes Assem embly slots 5 and 6 S S [ ] [ ] Assembly slot 5 not assembled 4 BA/ BE (BA9 to BA/BE5, BE6) 5 BE (BE5 to BE9) relays (BA9, BA) Y-hold (AA7) -AE (AE9 to AE) AA/ BE (AA7 to AA9/BE5 to BE7) Assembly slot 6 not assembled 4 BA/ BE (BA to BA6 /BE, BE) 5BE (BEtoBE4) relays (BA, BA4) Y-hold (AA4) -AE (AE6 to AE8) AA/ BE (AA4 to AA6/ BE to BE) Binary inputs Assignment of control signals to the binary inputs S4 CB S5 He S6 N S7 Si S8 bls bls S9 blps blps S PI S PII S PAU S Δw S4 Δw S5 Δy S6 Δy S7 ybl S8 ybl Assignment [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] High Low 4 [] 4 [] 4 [4] BE BE BE BE4 Basic card BE5 BE6 Slot BE7 BE8 5 BE BE BE Slot BE BE 6 BE FE9 FE FE FE [ ] factory setting Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-89

190 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Manual Direction of effect of the digital inputs on assigned control signals S9 CB/CBΙΙ S4 He/HeΙΙ S4 N/NΙΙ S4 Si/SiΙΙ S4 PΙ /PΙΙ S44 dw/dw S45 dy/dy S46 ybl/ybl yblιι/yblιι Direction of effect [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] 4 V = High V=High Direction of effect of the digital inputs BEs on bls, blps and PAU corresponds to the meaning position. Structure switches Switch position Function Structure switches Switch position Function Digital inp puts setpoint switching S47 S48 S49 S5 S5 S5 S5 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Control signal CB static without acknowledgement static with acknowledgement dynamic as pulse (flip-flop effect) Control signal N (follow-up) static dynamic as pulse (flip-flop effect) Blocking switching Internal/External internal only external only no blocking x-tracking at H N (DDC) Si no yes setpoint in event of CB failure last wi (at S5 = last w) safety setpoint SH Follow-up of wi to the active setpoint yes no Source for the external setpoint absolute setpoint WEA incremental setpoint WE Co ontrol algorith thm S54 S55 S56 S57 S58 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Direction of effect of controller I referenced to xd I normal (cp > ) reversed (cp < ) Delement and z lock-on controller I D-element z xd I y xi y Direction of effect D-element (z(fe4)) against x Direct. of effect with x D-element (z(fe4)) Direction of effect controller II referenced to xd II normal (cp > ) reversed (cp < ) Delement lockon controller II D-element z xd II y xii y Direction of effect D-element (z(fe7)) against x Direction of effect D-element (z(fe7)) with x Adaptation selection no adaptation possible control behavior without overshoot control behavior with periodic transient response according to amount optimum S59 [ ] Parameter control without Controller I (instead of parameter set I) Controller II (instead of param. set II) [ ] factory setting Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) 9 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

191 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Structure switches Switch position Function S6 Assignment of the controlling variable SG for the parameter control SG controlling variable Display SG in AdAP [ % ] Control algorithm [] xdi at S59 = or xdii at S59 = xi ats59=or xii at S59 = wi ats59=or wii at S59 = y xv wv AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A FE FE FE FE4 FE5 FE6 % at Pi(D) and % at P (D) AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA FE7 FE8 FE9 FE FE FE xi /xii xi /xii y xv xv AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A FE FE FE FE4 FE5 FE6 yii AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA FE7 FE8 FE9 FE FE FE Structure switches Switch position Function Structure switches Switch position Function output switchin ng S6 S6 S6 S64 S65 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 4 [ ] Priority N (DDC) or H N (DDC) H Source for external manipulated variable absolute manipulated variable YN incremental manipulated variable YN Manual operation in event of transmitter fault no switching (fault display only) manual operation starting with last y manual operation starting with ys switching manual / automatic via Manual key Hi control s. He interlock He ES yes yes/static with no yes/static with no switching, only manual mode yes yes/dynamic with yes yes/dynamic without Function split range (for K-controller only) Y rising / Y falling Y rising / Y rising ydisplay y s analog goutputs S67 S68 S69 S7 S7 S7 [ ] off [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Manipulated variable display controller output y split range output y, y position feedback y R no display Direction of effect of the manipulated variable display normal: yan = y inverted: yan = % y Output signal AA toma 4tomA Output signal AA toma 4tomA Output signal AA toma 4tomA Output signal AA4 toma 4tomA Slot 6 Basic controller S66 Table 8 [ ] Iy switch off in N/DDC mode (for K-controller only) without with Structure switch tables (continued) [ ] factory setting SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-9

192 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Manual Assignment of analog outputs to controller signals S7 AA S74 AA S75 AA assigned to [ ] [ ] [ ] % y y y AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A FE FE FE FE4 FE5 FE6 5 % xd I 5 % xd I xi wi xv wv 5 % xd II 5 % xd II xii wii 5 % xds 5 % xds yii y y4 AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA FE7 FE8 FE9 FE FE FE [ ] factory setting Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) 9 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

193 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Digital outputs Assignment of digital signals to digital outputs S76 S77 S78 S79 S8 S8 S8 S8 S84 S85 RB RC H N A A A A4 MUF Int I assignment to [] [] [] [] none [ ] [ ] [ ] [ 4 ] [ 5 ] [ 6 ] BA BA BA BA4 BA5 BA6 BA7 BA8 Basic card BA9 Slot BA BA 5 BA BA Slot BA4 BA5 6 BA6 Note: Same assignment initiates or function Unassigned digital outputs BAs can be set by SES In structured S-controllers (S, or S bei S = ) the outputs dy / dy are fixed to BA7 / BA8, or BA5 / BA6 Direction of effect of the digital outputs S86 S87 S88 S89 S9 S9 S9 S9 RB/RBII RC/RCII H/HII N/NII A/A A/A4 MUF Int I/Int II Direction of effect [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 4 V = High V = High Remark: S-controller outputs dy / dy are always High active [ ] factory setting Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-9

194 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Manual Assignment of limit value alarm inputs A, A to the controller signals S94 A (A) S95 A (A4) NOTE: [ ] [ ] Input xdi xi wi xv wv xdii xii wii y y y AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A FE FE FE FE4 FE5 FE6 xds yii y y4 AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA FE7 FE8 FE9 FE FE FE xdi xdii S94: Assignment also for A, if S67= S95: Assignment also for A4, if S68= [ ] factory setting Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) 94 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

195 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Structure switches Switch position Function Structure switches Switch position Function Limit value ala arms S96 S97 S98 [ ] [ ] [ ] Funct. of the limit value alarms A, A A max / A min A min/ A min A max / A max A min/ A max Funct. of the limit value alarms A, A4 A max / A4 min A min/ A4 min A max / A4 max A min/ A4 max Setting and display of the limit values A to A4 Display in the Setting in the process operation process operation level level no no yes no yes yes S S [ ] 4 5 [ ] 4 5 Data transfer Reception Control signal Source for by DR CB BE /CB ES w E y N nothing only w EA y N configure CB BE bzw. bzw. W E y N configure CB BE CB ES w ES y ES process CB BE CB ES variables CB BE CB ES w EA y N status CB BE CB ES or or registers W E y N Data transfer rate 9,6 baud 4,8 baud,4 baud, baud 6 baud baud Restar art condit itions S99 S [ ] [ ] Restart conditions after mains recovery and manual reset last operating mode, last w, last y manual and internal operation, last w, Optical signaling after mains recovery or reset without flashing of the digital with } x display Serial interf rface S S4 S5 [ ] [ ] [ ] Cross parity even odd Longitudinal parity position without after ETX before ETX Longitudinal parity normal inverted S6 [ ].. 5 Station no... 5 S7 [ ].. 5 Time monitor CBES without s s.. 5 s The serial interface in the SIPART DR must be set as follows for operation on the Profibus DP: Structure switch Setting S (recommendation) S S S4 S5 S6 5 S7 < [ ] factory setting Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-95

196 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Manual Structure switches S S S Switch position [ ] [ ] [ ] Function Input signal AE6... ma without MUF... ma with MUF 4... ma without MUF 4... ma with MUF Input signal AE7... ma without MUF... ma with MUF 4... ma without MUF 4... ma with MUF Input signal AE8... ma without MUF... ma with MUF 4... ma without MUF 4... ma with MUF Assignment FE7 FE to AEA AEbA S FE7 [ ] S FE8 [ ] S4 FE9 [ ] S5 FE [ ] S6 FE [ ] S7 FE [ ] assignment to % AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA S [ ] Input signal AE9... ma without MUF... ma with MUF 4... ma without MUF 4... ma with MUF S4 [ ] Input signal AE... ma without MUF... ma with MUF 4... ma without MUF 4... ma with MUF S5 [ ] Input signal AE... ma without MUF... ma with MUF 4... ma without MUF 4... ma with MUF S6 [ ] Root extraction AE6 no yes S7 [ ] Root extraction AE7 no yes S8 [ ] Root extraction AE8 no yes S9 [ ] Root extraction AE9 no yes S [ ] Root extraction AE no yes S [ ] Root extraction AE no yes [ ] factory setting Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) 96 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

197 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Assignment of control signals to the binary inputs S8 blb S9 CBII S HeII S NII S SiII S /tsi S4 /tsii S5 wsli S6 wslιι S7 yblii S8 yblii S69*) tshi S7*) tshii Assignment [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] High Low BE BE Basic BE card BE BE5 BE6 Slot BE7 BE8 5 BE BE BE Slot BE BE 6 BE FE9 FE FE FE *) As of software version C9 Direction of effect of the digital inputs on assigned control signals S9 /tsi and /tsii [] [ ] factory setting S /wsli and /wslii [] Direction of effect 4 V = High V=High Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-97

198 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Manual Structure switches Switch position Function Structure switches Switch position Function S S S S4 S5 S6 S7 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Output structure controller K-output S-output internal feedback S-output external feedback Blocking switching Internal/External controller at S = internal only external only no blocking x-tracking controller at HN(DDC)Si no yes Setpoint at CB II failure wi we or last wes Follow-up wi II to active setpoint yes no Display switching at ratio controller/cascade xv, wv / xv, wve xv, wv / x, w (standardized to Ad, Ed) xv, wv / x, wve / x, w (standardized to Ad, Ed) unused output switching S8 S9 S4 S4 S4 S4 [ ] [ ] [ ] 4 [ ] [ ] [ ] off priority NII (DDC) or HII NII (DDC) HII Manual operation controller II in case of transmitter fault no switching manual operation starting with last yii manual operation starting with ysii Switching manual/automatic controller II via ManualkeyHi controls.he interlockhe ES yes yes/static with no yes/static with no switching manual operation yes yes/dynamic with yes yes/dynamic without Function split range controller (only K controller) y rising / y4 falling y rising / y4 rising Iy switch off in N II/DDC II mode (only K controller) without with Manipulated variable display controller controller output yii split range outputs y/y4 position feedback y R II no display S44 [ ] Direction of effect manipulated variable display controller normal: yan = yii inverted: yan = % yii S45 [ ] Manipulated variable limit YA/YE only active in automatic operation active in all operating modes S46 [ ] Manipulated variable limit YAII/YEII only active in automatic operation active in all operating modes S47 [ ] Output signal AA5 toma 4tomA ana nalog outpu puts S48 S49 S5 [ ] [ ] [ ] Output signal AA6 toma 4tomA Output signal AA7 toma 4tomA Output signal AA8 toma 4tomA S5 [ ] Output signal AA9 toma 4tomA [ ] factory setting Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) 98 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

199 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Assignment of analog outputs to controller signals S5 AA4 S5 AA5 S54 AA6 S55 AA7 S56 AA8 S57 AA9 assignment to [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] % yi y y AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A FE FE FE FE4 FE5 FE6 5 % xd I 5 % xd I xi wi xv wv 5 % xd II 5 % xd II xii wii 5 % xds I 5 % xds I yii y y4 AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA FE7 FE8 FE9 FE FE FE Assignment of digital signals to digital outputs S58 /RB II S59 /RC II S6 HII S6 NII S6 Int II S6 FE9 S64 FE S65 FE S66 FE assignment to [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] none BA BA BA BA4 BA5 BA6 BA7 BA8 BA9 BA BA BA BA BA4 BA5 BA6 [ ] factory setting Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-99

200 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) Manual Assignment of limit value alarm inputs to the controller signals S67: input limit value alarm A S67: input limit value alarm A4 S67 A S68 A4 Input Function [] [] likeaor.a xdi xi wi xv wv xdii xii wii y y y AEA AEA AEA AE4A AE5A FE FE FE FE4 FE5 FE6 xds yii y y4 AE6A AE7A AE8A AE9A AEAA AEbA FE7 FE8 FE9 FE FE FE jxdιj jxdιιj S7 []... 8 S7 [] **) **) tsh see S8 *) Locking of status signals via the serial interface SES with locking by RC with locking by RB without locking S69 []... 8 tsh see S8 *) [ ] factory setting *) As of software version C9 **) As of software version D6 Table 8 Structure switch tables (continued) SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

201 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..7 Structuring mode FdEF (define functions)..7 Structuring mode FdEF (define functions) In the FdEF mode (only appears when S4 = ) the functions for the freely connectable input range are determined (defined) which are to be used for the user program. The functions are defined with YES or suppressed with no (factory setting: all functions no). Only the functions marked YES appear in the structuring modes FCon (connect functions) and FPos (position functions) The functions are stored in alphabetical order and are called one after another as questions, the answer is set with YES or no. Table -9 Digital display x (question) w (answer) Ar Ar Ar Ar4 Ar5 Ar6 Fu Fu YES or no MA MA MA Mi Mi Mi Question/answer cycle structuring mode FdEF Digital display (continued) x (question) w (answer) re AS AS AS AS4 AS5 YES or no Co Co na na no no Answer no or YES 9 SIPART DR C ST Int 4 Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: current status Return to structuring flashes off Striped pattern ID offline A A A SPW Adjustment answer: no or YES Controlled variable x 7 4 A4 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key: ON (manual operation) no function Question Ar n 6 PS 4 (Parameterization/ structuring) I II OUT-Y Enter LED: Shift key : Controller LEDs: off Continuous pressing switches the process display to unsignaled controller steady or flashing light signals displayed controller SIEMENS SIPART DR.. Adjustment question Figure - Control and display elements in the structuring mode FdEF SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

202 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..8 Structuring mode FCon (connect functions, connection) Manual..8 Structuring mode FCon (connect functions, connection) In the FCon mode (only appears when S4 = ) the functions defined with YES in the FdEF mode are connected (software connected ) with each other and with the selectable inputs and outputs (FE to FE) of the freely connectable range. A connection is made by setting a data source/data sink pair on the digital x and y display. The data sink (question) is always set first followed by the data source (answer). The connection is established when switching to the next data sink or returning to the structuring preselection mode FCon. The data sinks (inputs of the functions and the outputs of the freely connectable range) and the data sources (outputs of the functions and inputs of the freely connectable range) are stored in the listed order. The data sources and sinks of the functions defined by no are hidden. Every data sink can only be assigned exactly one data source whereas every source can be connected with as many sinks as you like. The parallel loop of inputs (sinks) is therefore achieved by connection of the respective inputs with the same output (source). The presettings of the inputs (ncon or numeric values) specified in the description of the various functions is transferred to the FCon mode and can be changed (overwritten) there if necessary. Changes in the FdEF, if FCon has already been carried out If functions defined by YES are overwritten by no after connection in the FdEF mode, the existing connection to the inputs and outputs of the functions overwritten by no is removed. The inputs (data sinks) fed by the output of the deleted function are identified by ncon (not connected). Error message ncon Err It is not permissible to end the connection with data sinks defined by ncon because the desired functions cannot run with undefined inputs. If the structuring preselection level is to be left with the Exit key and some data sinks (inputs) are still defined by ncon, the flashing error message ncon Err appears and the structuring preselection level is not exited, the error can be corrected (Enter key) or ignored (Exit key). The error message is acknowledged by pressing the Enter key. It returns to the configuring mode FCon to the first data sink marked ncon, the error can be corrected. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

203 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..8 Structuring mode FCon (connect functions, connection) x (question) Ar. Ar.5 Ar6. Ar6.5 FE FE Fu. Fu. MA. MA. MA. MA. MA. MA. Mi. Mi. Mi. Mi. Mi. Mi. re. re. re. AS. AS. AS5. AS5. Co. Co. Co. Co. na. na. na. na. no. no. no. no. Digital display w (answer) ncon AEA AEbA Ar.6 Ar6.6 Fu. Fu. MA.4 MA.4 MA.4 Mi.4 Mi.4 Mi.4 P P5 re AS.4 AS5.4 Co.4 Co.4 na.4 na.4 no.4 no.4 be be9 AE AE5 AE A A A A4 Int I Int II SPiI SPiII SPI SPII yi yii SAA SAA4 Table - Question/answer cycle of the structuring mode FCon SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

204 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..8 Structuring mode FCon (connect functions, connection) Manual Answer ncon AEA... SAA4 9 SIPART DR C ST Int 4 Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: current status Return to structuring preselection level after FCon flashes off Striped pattern ID offline A A A SPW Adjustment answer (data sources) Controlled variable x Ar. Question no. (Data sinks) 7 6 PS 4 (Parameterization/ structuring) SIEMENS A4 4 I II OUT-Y SIPART DR 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key: Enter LED: Shift key : Controller LEDs: ON (manual mode) no function off Continuous pressing switches the process display to unsignaled controller steady or flashing light signals displayed controller.. Adjustment question (data sinks) Figure - Control and display elements in the structuring mode FCon 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

205 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..9 Structuring mode FPoS (position functions)..9 Structuring mode FPoS (position functions) In the FPos mode (only appears when S4 = ) the chronological order for processing the functions defined by YES in FdEF is determined. This chronolgical processing of the freely connectable range is inserted in the processing cycle of the controller at the right time. The position numbers to are called as questions and the positioning is established by assigning to a function (answer). Only defined functions appear in the answer cycle, already positioned functions are automatically deleted from the answer cycle. For positioning, the guideline applies that the input variables of a function have already been calculated before they have been processed. Since this requirement cannot be met, it must be taken into account that values from the previous cycle are used for operation in the case of feedbacks. If a positioned function is defined by no in FdEF, this function is deleted from the positioning list. The order for processing the other functions remains unchanged. The gap is closed automatically by shiting them together. Existing positioning sequences can be corrected with inst, delt and npos (in the answer cycle). D Function inst (insert) To insert a not yet positioned function in an existing positioning sequence. Set the position with y-keys () in place of which the not yet positioned function block is to be inserted. Set inst with w-keys (6) inst, the Enter-LED flashes and indicates the effectiveness of the Enter key. On pressing the Enter key (9), the set position number no** is defined by npos and the Enter LED goes out. The previous positioning series from no** is shifted up one position, the nr** can now be overwritten with the still free function. If the end of the positioning sequence is reached by the inst function (position number >), the function cannot be executed (Enter LED does not go out). D Function delt (delete) To close npos- gaps within a positioning sequence. Set the position number which is to be deleted with y-keys (). Set delt with the w-keys (6), the Enter LED flashes and indicates the effectiveness of the Enter key (9). On pressing the Enter key the set position number nr** is defined by the function of the following position numbers. The previous positioning sequence is moved down one position number from no**. D Function npos (not positioned) To exchange function blocks within a positioning sequence. Select the position numbers to be changed with the y-keys and mark respectively with npos. Then the functions overwritten with npos are available again in the answer cycle. They can be assigned to the position numbers occupied with npos. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-5

206 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..9 Structuring mode FPoS (position functions) Manual Error messages D PoS Err Ending positioning with unpositioned (but defined) functions is not allowed. If the structuring preselection level is to be exited with the Exit key, the flashing error message Pos Err appears for non-positioned functions. The structuring preselection level is not exited, the error can be corrected (Enter key) or ignored (Exit key). The error message is acknowledged by pressing the Enter key. It then jumps back to the first positioning number marked by npos in the structuring mode FPos, the error can be corrected. D npos Err Ending positioning with a positioning sequence which contains npos gaps is not allowed. If the configuring mode is to be exited with the Exit key and npos gaps still exist, the flashing error message npos Err exists. The structuring preselection level is not exited, the error can be corrected (Enter key) or ignored (Exit key). The error message is acknowledged by pressing the Enter key. It then jumps back to the first positioning number marked by npos in the structuring mode FPos, the error can be corrected. Digital display x (question) position number no. w (answer) function npos Ar Ar6 delt ) Fu Fu inst ) MA MA MA Mi Mi Mi re AS AS5 Co Co na na no no ) with Enter function Table - Question and answer cycle, structuring mode FPos 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

207 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..9 Structuring mode FPoS (position functions) Answer npos.. no 9 SIPART DR C ST Int 4 Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: current status Return to structuring preselection level after FPos flashes off Striped pattern ID offline Controlled variable x no Question no (Positioning number) PS 4 (Parameterization/ structuring) 8 A A SPW 6 A A4 4 I II OUT-Y SIEMENS SIPART DR.. Adjustment question Manual LED: Enter key : Enter LED: Adjustment answer Shift key : Controller LEDs: ON (manual operation) run inst or delt function flashes in inst and delt Continuous pressing switches the process display to unsignaled controller steady or flashing light signals displayed controller Figure - Control and display elements in the structuring mode FPoS Application example for the freely connectable input range D Problem Fixed value controller K with averaging of three controlled variables x to x and limiting of the maximum value to the main controlled variable x, i.e. if the average value exceeds the main controlled variable this becomes effective. wi x x x MIN x y x= x x x and x x SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-7

208 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..9 Structuring mode FPoS (position functions) Manual D Interfaces to the process x to x as 4 to ma signal via AE to AE y as 4 to ma signal via AA4 (y hold ) Power supply V D Controller version 6DR -5 and 6DR8-8A in slot 6 D Connection diagram x AE A x AE A x AE A... Ar.F Ar. Ar. Ar. Ar.4 Ar.5 E E E E4 E5 E EE-E4 E5 no. A Ar.6 P.. Ar.F Ar. Ar. Ar. Ar.4 Ar.5 E E E E4 E5 E EE-E4 E5 nr A Ar.6.5 Mi.F Mi E. Mi. E Mi E. no A x Min. Mi.4 FE..... FE FE FE 4 FE 5 FE 6 D Structurings StrS S = S4 = S5 = S6 = S7 = S = 4 S7 = rest of structure switches factory setting FdEF FCon FPos Question Answer Question Answer Question Answer Ar.F YES Ar., no Ar.F Ar.F YES. AEA no Ar.F Mi.F YES. AEA no Mi.F Rest no.4,.5, Ar.,. Ar.6. AEA ofpa.4, PAST depending on task set.5 P FE Mi.4,, 4, 5, 6, Mi. AE.A. Ar.6.,5 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

209 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Structuring mode FPSt (Functions Preset, factory setting) D Parameterizations (onpa) P =, rest of parameters after task set.. Structuring mode FPSt (Functions Preset, factory setting) The structuring mode FPSt only appears when S4 = and serves to reset the freely connectable range to the factory setting. We recommend that you run the Preset function first in the case of extensive changes in the structuring modes FdEF, FCon and FPos. Answer no or YES 9 SIPART DR C ST Int 4 Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: current status Return to structuring preselection level after FPSt flashes off Striped pattern ID offline A A A SPW Adjustment no or YES, set YES Controlled variable x 7 4 A4 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key : ON (manual operation) up to structuring preselection level FdEF appears Enter LED: flashes at YES and FPSt FPSt 6 PS 4 (Parameterization/ structuring) I II OUT-Y Shift key : Controller LEDs: Continuous pressing switches the process display to unsignaled controller steady or flashing light signals displayed controller SIEMENS SIPART DR.. no function Figure -4 Control and display elements in the structuring mode FPSt After jumping to the structure mode FPSt with the Enter key no FPSt appears. Set YES with w key (6.) and press the Enter key (9) until the structuring preselection level appears with FdEF. The Preset function is run. Select structuring mode FdEF by pressing the Enter key and make new definitions. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-9

210 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Structuring mode APSt (All Preset, factory setting) Manual.. Structuring mode APSt (All Preset, factory setting) The structuring mode APSt serves to reset all controller functions (parameters and structures) to the factory setting. We recommend you to run the APSt function first if major changes are to be made to the configuration. Answer no or YES 9 SIPART DR C ST Int 4 Internal LED: Exit key : Exit LED: Adaptation LED: current status Return to structuring preselection level after APSt flashes off Striped pattern ID offline A A A SPW Adjustment no or YES, set YES Controlled variable x 7 4 A4 8 9 Manual LED: Enter key : ON (manual operation) until structuring preselection level Strs appears Enter LED: flashes at YES and APSt APSt 6 PS 4 (Parameterization/ structuring) I II OUT-Y Shift key : Controller LEDs: Continuous pressing switches the process display to unsignaled controller steady or flashing light signals displayed controller SIEMENS SIPART DR.. no function Figure -5 Control and display functions in the structuring mode APSt No APSt appears after jumping to the structuring mode APSt with the Enter key. Set YES with w key (6.) and press the Enter key (9) until the structuring preselection level appears with StrS. The Preset function is run. Select structuring mode Strs by pressing the Enter key and re-structure the controller. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

211 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Set structuring mode CAE4/CAE5 UNI module(s).. Set structuring mode CAE4/CAE5 UNI module(s) The measuring ranges for the various selectable signal transmitters for slot (AE4) or slot (AE5) can be defined in these menus and fine adjustment performed if necessary. The CAE4 menu is only offered in the selection level if S8 is set 4. The CAE5 module is only offered in the selection level if S9 is set 4. When S8 (S9) = 4, 6 the appropriate measuring signal is set to in the event of a broken sensor, when S8 (S9) = 5, 7 it is set to. The following parameters are available in the CAE4/CAE5 menus for setting the measuring range and adjustment: Parameter Meaning SEnS Sensor type Mv. tc.in Display w Parameter range tc.eh Pt.4L Pt.L Pt.L r. r. unit Temperature unit _C _F _AbS tc tb ) Thermocouple type Temperature reference point L,J,H,S,b,r,E n,t,u Lin Meaning Setting Mv signal Thermocouple internal reference point Thermocouple external reference point PT 4-wire PT -wire PT -wire Resistor < 6 Resistor <,8 k Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Kelvin Type L,J,K,S,B,R,E,N,T,U Factory setting Mv. _C L Display unit Display/ function only when: SEnS=tc.in, tc/eh any type (without linearization) _C, _F, _AbS SEnS=tc.EH Display x parameters Mr Line resistance.... ohms SEnS=Pt.L Cr Calibration Difference ohms SEnS=Pt.L line resistance to Mr MP Decimal point measuring range _.- to.- MA ) Range start Mv, _C, _F, _AbS ME ) Range full scale depending on setting SEnS CA ) CE ) Calibration range start Calibration range full scale curr. measured value / A curr. measured value / E PC 4) Preset calibration no,yes,no C SEnSE!=r._, r. ) If no specified type of thermocouple is selected with tc=lin, parameter tb in inactive. ) The set measuring range standardizes the measured value to to for transfer to the connectable range. If the physical operating display of the measuring value is to be made, the assigned display dp,da,de must be set accordingly. ) For SEnS=r._ / r. the unit of the CA/CE display is in %. 4) Effect PC for SEnS = Mv., tc.in, tc.eh, Pt.L, Pt.L, Pt.4L. PC=no C is displayed with A=E=. It is not possible to switch to YES with ta. PC=no is displayed by adjusting CA/CE (fine calibration). It is possible to switch to YES. Fine calibration is reset by pressing the Enter key (s). ( A= E=, PC=no C). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

212 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..set structuring mode CAE4/CAE5 UNI module(s) Manual The corresponding settings of the CAE4(5) menus for the different signal transmitters are described below. The range and thus the current measured value can be corrected with the parameters CA/CE to compensate tolerances of the transmitters or adjustments with other display instruments.... Measuring range for mv (SEnS=Mv.) D MA/ME measuring range Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale: 75 mv MA ME 75 _C D CA/CE fine adjustment Call parameter CA: Set signal at the low end of the range, correct the display with CA if necessary. Call parameter CE: Set signal at the top end of the range, correct the display with CE if necessary.... Measuring range for U, I (SEnS=Mv.) D MA/ME measuring range The setting is made in mv (75 mv to 75 mv); The input signal types U and I are set to range / to mv in the measuring range plug (6DR858J); Example: tovortoma: tovor4toma: MA =, MA =, Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale. ME = ; ME = D CA/CE fine adjustment Call parameter CA: Set signal at the low end of the range, correct the display with CA if necessary. Call parameter CE: Set signal at the top end of the range, correct the display with CE if necessary. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

213 Manual Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode).. Set structuring mode CAE4/CAE5 UNI module(s)... Measuring range for thermocouple with internal reference point (SEnS=tc.in) D D D Set tc thermocouple type MA/ME measuring range Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale according to the temperature unit (unit). CA/CE fine adjustment Call parameter CA: Set signal at the low end of the range, correct the display with CA if necessary. Call parameter CE: Set signal at the top end of the range, correct the display with CE if necessary....4 Measuring range for thermocouple with external reference point (SEnS=tc.EH) D D D D Set tc thermocouple type tb-external reference point temperature Set the external reference point temperature with tb. Specify temperature unit with unit. Attention: tb has no effect at tc=lin MA/ME measuring range Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale according to temperature unit (tc). CA/CE fine adjustment Call parameter CA: Set signal at the low end of the range, correct the display with CA if necessary. Call parameter CE: Set signal at the top end of the range, correct the display with CE if necessary....5 Measuring range for PT-4-wire and PT--wire connection (SEnS=Pt.L/PT.4L) D D MA/ME measuring range Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale: - _C MA ME 85 _C Specify temperature unit with Unit. CA/CE fine adjustment Call parameter CA: Set signal at the low end of the range, correct the display with CA if necessary. Call parameter CE: Set signal at the top end of the range, correct the display with CE if necessary. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

214 Operation. Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)..set structuring mode CAE4/CAE5 UNI module(s) Manual...6 Measuring range for PT--wire connection (SEnS=Pt.L) D MR/CR adjustment of the feed line resistance Path : Path : The feed line resistance is known. Enter the known resistance with parameter MR. CR is ignored. The feed line resistance is unknown. Short circuit PT sensor at the measuring point. Call parameter CR and press Enter key until. is displayed. MR displays the measured resistance value. D MA/ME measuring range Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and end: - _C MA ME 85 _C Specify temperature unit with Unit. D CA/CE fine adjustment Call parameter CA: Set signal at the low end of the range, correct the display with CA if necessary. Call parameter CE: Set signal at the top end of the range, correct the display with CE if necessary....7 Measuring range for resistance potentiometer (SEnS=r._ for R < 6, SEnS=r. for R<.8 k ) Path : Path : The start and end values of the Rpotentiometer are known. Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale: MA ME 6 /.8 k Parameters CA/CE display at R=MA %, at R=ME %. The start and full range value of the Rpotentiometer are unknown. Call parameter CA : Move final control element to position %, press Enter until. % is displayed. Call parameter CE : Move final control element to position %, press Enter until. % is displayed. Parameters MA/ME show the appropriate resistance values. MP must be set so that there is no exceeding of the range (display: ofl) 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

215 Manual 4 Commissioning 4. Adapting the controller direction of effect to the controlled system 4 Commissioning 4. Adapting the controller direction of effect to the controlled system D Definitions Normal effect system Increasing y causes increasing x; e.g. increasing energy supply or increasing mass flow causes increasing temperature. Normal effect final control element (valve): Increasing current or actuating command y cause actuator to open (increasing y); e.g. a greater energy supply or greater mass flow. y An is the displayed manipulated variable. In cascade controls the folowup controller for observing the direction of effect of the master controller is considered part of the controlled system. The direction of effect of the controller is referenced to the main controlled variables FE and FE. The following statements apply for normal effect transmitters (increasing physical variable causes increasing transmitter current), increasing process display (de*>da*) and no reservation in the freely connectable range or no falling characteristic in linearization in the fixed connected range. D Direction of effect of system and actuator known K controller The following is prescribed: Directiotiotion Direc- Direc- of effect of effect of effect of the system normal normal normal % rises opens rises pos. y reversinsing rever- % falls opens rises neg. % - y normal % falls closes rises neg. % - y reversing % rises opens falls neg. y rever- normal % rises closes rises pos. y sing % falls opens falls pos. % - y rever- sing of the actuator of the system and the actuator Select the desired effect here: pressing the right key causes in manual operation ma on actuating value/ valve actual currentlled control- variable This gives settings of S54 or S56 and S68 and function of the controller S54 or S56 Kp (cp) S68 y An = Two more lines could be added to the table which are useless in practice: normal effect system in which the actual values falls with a rising change in the manipulated variable. Table 4- Controller direction of effect and y-display direction of effect of the system and actuator direction of effect in K-controllers SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-5

216 4 Commissioning 4. Adapting the controller direction of effect to the controlled system Manual S controller The following is prescribed: Select the desired effect here: This gives settings of S54 or S56 and S68 and function of Direction of effect tion ses in manual operation: actual the controller of effect of the of effect value/ Direction Direc- pressing the right key cau- of the actuator of the control- system system active switching valve led S54 and actuator rises output is variable or Kp S68 y An = S56 (cp) normal y opens normal y opens rises pos. y R rever- y rever- - y closes rises neg. % - y R sing opens sing y opens falls neg. y R If the actuator is connected reversing as an exception ( y closes), the position feedback must also be reversed and the controller direction of effect (Kp) negated. Table 4- Controller direction of effect and y-display direction of effect of system and actuator direction of effect in S-controllers D Direction of effect of system and actuator unknown Put controller in manual mode, leave structure switches S54, S56 and S68 in factory setting (). Determine direction of effect of the actuator Press the right manipulated variable adjusting key if possible with the process switched off or near to its safety position and observe whether the actuator opens or closes. If the actuator opens this means it has normal effect. If closing is determined in S-controllers, the connections y and - y should be switched. The actuator can be monitored as follows: normal effect system: rising x means normal effect actuator reversing member: falling x means normal effect actuator in S-controllers and already correctly connected position feedback: rising y-display means normal effect actuator The actuator can be monitored additionally at the installation location. Determine the direction of effect of the system Actuate the right manipulated variable and observe on the actual value display whether the controlled variable (actual value) rises or falls. Rising means normal effect system with normal effect actuator, reversing effect system with reversing actuator. Falling means reversing effect system with normal effect actuator, normal effect system with reversing actuator. With the direction of effect of actuator and system determined in this way, the controller can be set according to table 4-, page 5 and table SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

217 Manual 4 Commissioning 4. Setting the split range outputs and the actuating time Note for cascade control In cascade controllers first the direction of effect of the followup controller is determined and set as described above if necessary. Then the direction of effect of the master controller is adapted to the system. This is done as described above. It must be noted that the followup controller has been switched to internal operation because manual adjustment of the master controller is performed by adjusting the setpoint of the followup controller. The display should be switched to the master controller with the Shift key () to observe the main manipulated variable. 4. Setting the split range outputs and the actuating time in K-controllers (S = ) D Split range outputs Y, Y In split range operation the two partial manipulated variables must be adapted to the control range of the individual final control elements with the slope setting so that as constant a system amplification Ks as possible is achieved over the whole setting range. Determine the system line amplifications in the partial setting ranges in manual operation. Ks= Δx andks= Δx Δy Δy Then set Y and Y so that at S65 = rising falling at S65 = rising rising % Y Y = Ks Ks Y % Y = Ks Ks D Floating time ty At S6 = : set ty to the floating time of the following actuating drive. If the control circuit is to be calmed additionally, e.g. to avoid hard impact on the actuating drive, ty can be further increased in Automatic operation. At S6 = : set ty to the desired floating time for the incremental follow-up variable. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-7

218 4 Commissioning 4. Adaptation of the S-controller to the actuating drive Manual 4. Adaptation of the S-controller to the actuating drive D S-controller with internal feedback (S = ) The floating time of the actuating drive is set with the online parameter ty ( to s); Attention:the factory setting is off! The online parameter te should be selected at least great enough that the actuating drive starts moving reliably under consideration of the power switches connected before it. The greater the value of te, the more resistant to wear and more gentle the switching and drive elements connected after the controller operate. Large values of te require a greater dead band AH in which the controller cannot control defined because the resolution of the controlled variable diminishes with increasing turn-on duration. The factory setting is ms for te. This corresponds to a y resolution in a 6 s actuating drive of: Δy = % te ty = % ms 6 s =.% The minimum possible resolution is transposed with the system line amplification Ks to the controlled variable: Δx =K s Δy The parameter ta (minimum turn-off time) should be chosen at least great enough that the actuating drive is safely disconnected under consideration of the power switches connected before it before a new pulse appears (especially in the opposite direction). The greater the value of ta, the more resistant to wear the switching and drive elements connected after the controller operate and the greater the dead time of the controller under some circumstances. The value of ta is usually set identical to the value of te. ta = te = to 4 ms are recommended for 6 s actuating drives. The more restless the controlled system, the greater the two parameters should be selected if this is reasonably justified by the controller result. According to the set te and the resulting y or x, the response threshold AH I must be set or for the controller II AH II. The following condition must be satisfied: AH I or AH II > x orah I or AH II > Ks te % ty Otherwise the controller outputs positioning increments although the control deviation has reached the smallest possible value due to the finite resolution. For setting of AHI or AHII see chapter 4.4, page 9. D S-controller with external feedback (S = ) The position control circuit is optimized with the online parameter ty. The same relationships apply as in the S-controller with internal position feedback whereby the dynamic of the position control circuit (non-linearities, follow-up) is added to the criteria of the processability of the positioning increments by the final control element. It will usually be necessary to select 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

219 Manual 4 Commissioning 4.4 Setting the filter and the response threshold ty and the resulting response thresholds smaller than in the S-controller with internal position feedback for the above mentioned reasons. The position control circuit is optimized in manual mode. To do this, S67 is set to for the optimizing phase so that the manual manipulated variable is preset as an absolute value. It must be noted that the active manipulated variable trails the manipulated variable display due to the floating time of the actuator. In the case of non-linearity in the position control circuit, the optimization must take place in the range of greatest slope. Set S67 to Set ta and te so that the actuating drive can just process the actuating increments (see S-controller with internal feedback). Set st order filter of the y R -input (tf,,, 4 or 5) to. Ty (real floating time of the drive). Increase ty until the position control circuit overshoots due to small manual changes in the manipulated variable (observe opposite pulse on the y-leds (5) in the y-display). Reduce ty slightly again until the position control circuit is calm. Reset S67 to. 4.4 Setting the filter and the response threshold Set the structure switch S to the mains frequency 5 or 6 Hz existing in the system (factory setting 5 Hz) to suppress faults due to the mains frequency. D D Filter of first order of analog inputs The filter time constants (tf to tfb) for the input filters are set in the onpa parameterization mode and to the greatest possible value permitted by the control circuit without affecting the controlability (tf to tfb < Tg). When using the adaptation method the appropriate input filters must be optimized. Adaptive, non-linear filters of the control difference Since the dead zone sets itself automatically and its size is therefore unknown, the time tfi or tfii (onpa) can only be selected so great that the control circuit cannot oscillate in the case of a large dead zone (tfi or tfii less than Tg). When using the D-part (PD, PID) the use of the adaptive, non-linear filter is strongly recommended because the input noise amplified by Kp vv can be suppressed. When using the adaptation method the filters must be set. D Optimization of the response threshold AH If the controller output is to be calmed or the load on the actuator reduced additionally, the response threshold AHI can be increased for controller I or AHII for controller II. The response threshold AH is given in S-controllers by the setting of te (see chapter 4., page 8) and must be greater than zero. A response threshold of approx..5 % is recommendable for K-controllers. It must be taken into account that the remaining control error can assume the value of the set response threshold. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-9

220 4 Commissioning 4.5 Automatic setting of control parameters Manual 4.5 Automatic setting of control parameters by the adaptation method The adaptation method should always be preferred to manual settings because the control results with the parameters gained from adaptation are better especially in slow controlled systems and this saves optimization time. D Presetting S58 selecting the control behavior (structuring mode Strs) No adaptation is possible when S58 =. In position a control behavior without overshoot is offered. In position changes in the command variables can be expected with a maximum 5 % overshoot. tu: Monitoring time (parameterization mode AdAP) tu is necessary for error messages only and has no influence on the identification quality. tu must be set at least double the transient recovery time T 95 of the controlled system. If you have little knowledge of the controlled system, use tu = off (factory setting) for adapting. After successful adaptation tu is automatically set to T 95. At tu <. h (6 min) tu = off is displayed. dpv: Direction of the step command (parameterization mode AdAP) The direction of the controlled variable change from the set operating point is selected with this configuring switch: x manual x = ks (y manual y). In controlled systems with batches it is recommendable to perform one adaptation with rising x and one with falling x. The averaged or dynamically more uncritical parameters can then be used for the control. dy: Amplitude of the step command (parameterization mode AdAP) The step command must be selected so great that the controlled variable changes by at least 4 % and the controlled variable change must be 5 times the average noise level. The greater the controlled variable change, the better the identification quality. Controlled variable changes of approx. % are recommended. D Notes on certain types of control for pre-adaptation Cascade control Double controllers are always adapted to the controller selected by the Shift key (). In cascade controls the sequence controller is adapted first in manual operation by selecting the controller I with the Shift key (). We recommend you to use the controller version without overshoot (S58=) so that the command behavior is uncritical. Then the master controller is adapted in internal and automatic mode of the follow-up controller. To do this, switch the folow-up controller to Internal on selecting the controller I (corresponds to manual operation of the master controller) and switch over to automatic operation, set the desired operating point by changing the setpoint if necessary. Then switch over to controller II (master controller) with the Shift key and start adaptation. The setpoint step of the follow-up controller is invisible for system identification. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

221 Manual 4 Commissioning 4.5 Automatic setting of control parameters Ratio-cascade control When adapting the master controller in ratio cascades, the master process variable should not fluctuate too greatly otherwise additional changes in this controlled variable may occur at a constant ratio factor (v v) due to the control dynamic of the ratio controller (follow-up controller) and non-linearities between the ratio factor and the controlled variable of the master controller. These additional changes in the controlled variable would falsify the adaptation result because only changes by the ratio factor are to be measured. Override controls When selecting the operating point in override controls (including the y-step for the adaptation) it must be ensured that the limiting setpoint is not exceeded in adaptation of the limiting controller and the main controller. If the desired operating point cannot be attained due to the operating state of the system, the adaptation must be made at a level which comes closest to the later operating state. In the example explained in chapter.5.4.9, page 77, (core temperature control with casing temperature limiting) the maximum permissible casing temperature cannot be reached in adaptation of the limiting controller if the cooling water flow is not interrupted. Therefore adaptation must take place at a low level without exceeding the maximum permissible core temperature. In the other case, if the cooling water is switched off or fails, the maximum permissible casing temperature is exceeded, when adapted to the normal core temperature. In this case adaptation must take place at a low core temperature. Non-linear controlled systems In non-linear controlled systems several adaptations should be made at different load states. The adaptation results and the (previously selected with S6) controlling variable SG must be noted. The controlling variable is also read off in the parameterization mode AdAP in the range from to %. The parameter sets determined in this way, related to the controlling variable SG, are then entered in the structuring mode PASt (if necessary with interpolation). In this way ideal controller results can be achieved even on non-linear controlled systems. D Notes on the adaptation results D-part In S-controllers and K-controllers on controlled systems of st order the D part brings no noticeable advantages due to the finite actuating time ty or for reasons founded in the control theory. The disadvantages in the form of wear on the positioning side dominate. Range limits If one of the determined parameters reaches its range limits, the other parameter should be adjusted slightly in the opposite direction of action. If systems of the 8th order are identified the determined Kp must be reduced for safety reasons and if the control circuit is too slow (uncritical), then re-increased in manual optimization. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

222 4 Commissioning 4.5 Automatic setting of control parameters Manual kp variation In the special cases, controlled system of the st order in connection with Pi and PiD controllers and controlled systems of nd order in connection with PiD controllers, the kp can be varied freely. In controller design according to the amount optimum, Kp can be increased up to % as a rule without the control behavior becoming critical. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

223 Manual 4 Commissioning 4.5 Automatic setting of control parameters Process operation level; see chapter., pg. 67 if nec. controller selection controller I or controller II, Switch controller to manual operation, set the desired operating point and wait for stationary condition! Filters tfi, tfii andtftotfb and floating time ty must be set! At S-controller ta, te and ty must be set! see fig. -, page 7 Selection level AdAP Adaptation after process operation Repeat adaptation Enter key (9) ) Exit key () Pre-adaptation Presettings Adaptation LED (4) OFF tu off,.to4h Monitoring time dpv neg, PoS Direction of the step Amplitude command dy.5to9% **.o Pi or Pid **.n Strt AdAP Enter key (9) Parameterization mode AdAP Start adaptation Enter key (9) During adaptation Adaptation LED (4) flashing Complete process display Aborted adaptation Adaptation LED (4) OFF Switch controller to automatic mode, old parameters **.o are active Exit key () Old parameters **.o are retained Exit key () Exit key () Error message display by error messages of the adaptation procedure manual via Exit key see table -, pg. 77 Post adaptation Adaptation LED (4) ON cp.o Pi or Pid Exit key () AH.o y Keys () old parameters Switch controller to automatic operation, new parameters **.n are active Exit key () Old parameters **.o are overwritten by new parameters **.n ) Exit key () ) cp.n cp.n AH.n Pi.* Pid.* new parameters Figure 4- Parameterization mode AdAP * loop order to 8 ** Parameter name ) Enter function only active in manual operation (in the case of adaptation of the master controller in cascades (S = 5/6) master controller set to Internal and Automatic) ) Error message no AUto If new parameters are selected and there is parameter control, the flashing error message no AUto appears after pressing the Exit key (no automatic transfer). Press the Enter key: Error is acknowledged; return to parameterization mode AdAP; the parameters gained from the adaptation can be noted. Pressing the Exit key: Jump to the parameterization preselection mode AdAP; the new parameters **.n are deleted. On jumping to the parameterization mode AdAP, Strt AdAP appears in **.n. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

224 4 Commissioning 4.6 Manual setting of the control parameters Manual 4.6 Manual setting of the control parameters without knowledge of the plant behavior The control parameters for optimum control of the system are not yet known in this case. To keep the control loop stable in any case, the following factory settings must be made (the values apply for both parameter sets): Proportional action factor Kp =. Integral action time Tn = 9984 s Derivative action time Tv = off D P-controller (control signal P* = high) Set the desired setpoint and set the control difference to zero in manual operation. The operating point necessary for the control difference is set automatically in manual operation at Yo=AUto (factory setting). The working point can also be entered manually by setting the online parameter Yo to the desired operating point. Switch to automatic operation. Increase Kp slowly until the control loop tends to oscillate due to slight setpoint changes. Reduce Kp slightly until the oscillations disappear. D PD controller (control signal P* = high) Set the desired setpoint and set the control difference to zero in manual operation. The operating point necessary for the control difference is set automatically in manual operation at Yo=AUto (factory setting). The operating point can also be entered manually by setting the online parameter Yo to the desired operating point. Switch to automatic operation. Increase Kp slowly until the control loop tends to oscillate due to slight setpoint changes. Switch Tv from off to s. Increase Tv until the oscillations disappear. Increase Kp slowly until oscillations reappear. Repeat the setting according to the two previous steps until the oscillations can no longer be eliminated. Reduce Tv and Kp slightly until the oscillations are eliminated. D Pi controller (control signal P* = low) Set the desired setpoint and set the control difference to zero in manual operation. Switch to automatic operation. Increase Kp slowly until the control loop tends to oscillate due to slight setpoint changes. Reduce Kp slightly until the oscillations disappear. Reduce Tn until the control loop tends to oscillate again. Increase Tn slightly until the tendency to oscillate disappears. 4 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

225 Manual 4 Commissioning 4.7 Manual setting of the control parameters D PiD controller (control signal P* = low) Set the desired setpoint and set the control difference to zero in manual operation. Switch to automatic operation. Increase Kp slowly until the control loop tends to oscillate due to slight setpoint changes. Switch Tv from off) to s. Increase Tv until the oscillations disappear. Increase Kp slowly again until the oscillations reappear. Repeat the setting according to the previous two steps until the oscillations cannot be eliminated again. Reduce Tv and Kp slightly until the oscillations stop. Reduce Tn until the control loop tends to oscillate again. Increase Tn slightly until the tendency to oscillate disappears. 4.7 Manual setting of the control parameters after the transient function If the transient function of the controlled system is active or can be determined, the control parameters can be set according to the setting guidelines specified in the literature. The transient function can be recorded in the Manual mode position of the controller by a sudden change in the manipulated variable and the course of the controlled variable registered with a recorder. This will roughly give a transient function corresponding to 4-. Good average values from the setting data of several authors give the following rules of thumb: P-controller: Proportional action factor Kp Tg Tu Ks Pi-controller: Proportional action factor Kp.8 Tg Tu Ks Integral action time Tn Tu PiD controller: Proportional action factor Kp. Tg Tu Ks Integral action time Derivative action time Tn Tu Tv,4 Tu SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-5

226 4 Commissioning 4.7 Manual setting of the control parameters Manual y x Tg y t y w x t Tu Manipulated variable Command variable Controlled variable Time Delay time x Ks = x y Tg Compensation time Tu t Ks Transmission factor of the controlled system Figure 4- Transient function of a controlled system with compensation 6 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

227 Manual 5 Maintenance 5. General information and handling 5 Maintenance 5. General information and handling The controller is maintenance-free. White spirit or industrial alcohol is recommended for cleaning the front foil and the plastic casing if necessary. In the event of an error the modules Front module Main board Option modules may be changed freely without readjustment with power supplied. ATTENTION All modules contain components which are vulnerable to static. Observe the usual safety precautions! To maintain the current for the controller manipulated variable of the K-controller, use the y hold -module (see chapter.4., page ). Final control elements on S-controllers remain in their last position. WARNING! The power supply unit and the interface relay may only be changed when the power supply has been safely disconnected! WARNING! Modules may only be repaired in an authorized workshop. This applies in particular for the power supply unit and the interface relay due to the safety functions (isolation and functional extra-low voltages). SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-7

228 5 Maintenance 5. General information and handling Manual Fixing screw for the front module Figure 5- Front module with rating plate and cover removed Fixing screw (shaft screw) Sealing ring Front panel 4 Front board 5 Main board 6 Plug Ribbon cable 7 Power supply unit 8 Connection plate Figure 5- Controller with front module open 8 SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

229 Manual 5 Maintenance 5. General information and handling D Replacing the front module Carefully lever out the label cover with a screwdriver at the cutout at the top and snap the cover out of the bottom hinge points by bending slightly. Loosen screw (captive) (see () Figure 5-). Tip the front module at the screw head and pull out to the front angled slightly until the plug of the ribbon cable is accessible. Pull off the plug from the ribbon cable (see (6) Figure 5-). Install in reverse order. Make sure the seal is positioned perfectly! D Replacing the customer foil The customer foil should be pulled out from underneath the front panel with tweezers. It is labelled with the most important display and control symbols and the scale to %. D Replacing the main board and option module Pull off the plug terminal. Release the lock and pull out the module. Attention: Remove the front module from the main board first (connection cable!) Push in the new module as far as it will go and lock it (the modules are slot-coded but make sure the right modules are plugged into the slots provided for different options). Plug in the terminal (pay attention to slot labeling!), SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-9

230 5 Maintenance 5. General information and handling Manual D Replacing the power supply unit Pull out the mains plug! Loosen the clamps and remove the controller from the panel. Loosen the four fixing screws of the power supply unit (see () Figure 5-) (not the plated Phillips screws () Figure 5-) and pull out the power supply unit in screw direction. Bend the PE conductor contact spring slightly upwards and place the new power supply unit carefully on the plug terminals in screw direction and make sure the guide lugs snap in by moving slightly from side to side (it can no longer be moved from side to side when it has snapped in). Tighten the four fixing screws diagonally PE conductor contact spring fixing screws for the power supply unit (shaft screw) Plated Phillips screws for fixing the power supply circuit board in the casing 4 Power supply unit 5 Blanking plate 6 Plastic housing 7 Front module Figure 5- Fixing the power supply unit D LED test and software state If the Shift key () is pressed for about s ( PS flashes on the manipulated variable display after about 5 s), this leads to the LED test. All LEDs turn on, the digital displays indicate or S and a light bar covering three LEDs runs from to % (on reaching %, the light bar starts again at %). If the Internal/External key () is pressed permanently in addition during the lamp test, dr appears on the digital w-display dr, the software state of the device appears on the digital x-display and the current cycle time in ms appears on the y-display. During the LED test and display of the software state the controller continues to operate online in its last operating mode. SIPART DR 6DR C79-G7476-C54-

Product Information Mixed. Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL SIMATIC. ET 200SP Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL.

Product Information Mixed. Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL SIMATIC. ET 200SP Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL. Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL SIMATIC ET 200SP Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL Product Information Preface Application planning 1 Mounting 2 Connection

More information

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 4DO DC24V/0.5 A ST (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) Preface. Properties 1. Diagnostics 2.

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 4DO DC24V/0.5 A ST (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) Preface. Properties 1. Diagnostics 2. SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 4DO DC24V/0.5 A ST (6ES7132-4BD01- SIMATIC Preface Properties 1 Diagnostics 2 ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 4DO DC24V/0.5 A

More information

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 4DO DC24V/0.5A ST (6ES7132-4BD02-0AA0) Preface. Properties 2. Diagnostics 3.

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 4DO DC24V/0.5A ST (6ES7132-4BD02-0AA0) Preface. Properties 2. Diagnostics 3. Preface 1 Properties 2 SIMATIC Diagnostics 3 ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 4DO DC24V/0.5A ST (6ES7132-4BD02- Manual 01/2008 A5E01254028-01 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices

More information

SINAMICS G130. Terminal Module 150 (TM150) Operating Instructions 03/2013 SINAMICS

SINAMICS G130. Terminal Module 150 (TM150) Operating Instructions 03/2013 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions 03/2013 SINAMICS s Safety information 1 General information 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Technical specifications 5

More information

Siemens Spares. Preface 1. Scope of Delivery 2 SIPLUS CMS4000. Product Characteristics 3 ION PROFIBUS DP SPY T001 Installation and Maintenance 4

Siemens Spares. Preface 1. Scope of Delivery 2 SIPLUS CMS4000. Product Characteristics 3 ION PROFIBUS DP SPY T001 Installation and Maintenance 4 Preface 1 Scope of Delivery 2 Product Characteristics 3 Industrial I/O-Node ION PROFIBUS DP SPY T001 Installation and Maintenance 4 6AT8000-1BA00-5XA0 Notes on the CE Mark 5 References 6 Appendix 7 Release

More information

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O 2AO U HF analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB02-0AB0) Preface. Properties 1. Parameters 2.

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O 2AO U HF analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB02-0AB0) Preface. Properties 1. Parameters 2. SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O 2AO U HF analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB02-0AB0) Manual Preface Properties 1 Parameters 2 Diagnostics 3 Analog value representation

More information

S7-300 Programmable Controller

S7-300 Programmable Controller S7-300 Programmable Controller This description belongs to the following documentation packages with the order numbers given: S7 300 Programmable Controller 6ES7 398 8AA02 8BA0 ET 200M Distributed I/O

More information

ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) SIMATIC ET 200SP Digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual Edition 02/2014 Answers for industry. DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST Preface Guide to documentation 1 SIMATIC ET 200SP DQ

More information

SITOP power supply. Selectivity modules. Overview. Safety notes. Description, device design, dimension drawing. Mounting/removal 3

SITOP power supply. Selectivity modules. Overview. Safety notes. Description, device design, dimension drawing. Mounting/removal 3 Overview Safety notes 1 SITOP power supply Manual Description, device design, dimension drawing 2 Mounting/removal 3 Mounting position, mounting clearances 4 Installation 5 Technical data 6 Safety, approvals,

More information

BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00 ) SIMATIC. ET 200SP BaseUnits. Preface. Guide to the documentation 1. Product overview 2

BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00 ) SIMATIC. ET 200SP BaseUnits. Preface. Guide to the documentation 1. Product overview 2 BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00 ) SIMATIC ET 200SP BaseUnits (6ES7193-6BP.../3RK1908-0AP00 ) Manual Preface Guide to the documentation 1 Product overview 2 BaseUnits for I/O modules 3 BaseUnits

More information

Siemens Drives & PLCs

Siemens Drives & PLCs Automation System S7-300: Getting Started CPU 31xC: Commissioning Introduction 1 Preparation 2 SIMATIC S7-300 Automation System S7-300: Getting Started CPU 31xC: Commissioning Learning units 3 Further

More information

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O 2AO U ST analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0) Preface. Properties 1. Parameters 2.

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O 2AO U ST analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0) Preface. Properties 1. Parameters 2. SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O 2AO U ST analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0) Manual Preface Properties 1 Parameters 2 Diagnostics 3 Analog value representation

More information

ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 2DO AC V (6ES7132-4FB01-0AB0)

ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 2DO AC V (6ES7132-4FB01-0AB0) SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O SIMATIC Preface ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 2DO AC24..230V (6ES7132-4FB01-0AB0) Properties 1 Parameters 2 Diagnostics 3 Manual 04/2007 A5E01077264-01

More information

SIMATIC. Digital Input Module SM DI, DC24V - Sinking/Sourcing. Product information. Product Information

SIMATIC. Digital Input Module SM DI, DC24V - Sinking/Sourcing. Product information. Product Information SIMATIC Digital Input Module Product information 1 SIMATIC Digital Input Module Product Information This documentation is part of the documentation package with the order number: S7-300 Automation System:

More information

SINAMICS G130. Voltage Sensing Module 10 (VSM10) Operating Instructions 05/2010 SINAMICS

SINAMICS G130. Voltage Sensing Module 10 (VSM10) Operating Instructions 05/2010 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions 05/2010 SINAMICS s Safety information 1 General 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Voltage Sensing Module 10 (VSM10) Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Technical

More information

SIMATIC. FM 356 Application Function Module, Installation and Startup. Preface, Contents. User Information. Product Overview

SIMATIC. FM 356 Application Function Module, Installation and Startup. Preface, Contents. User Information. Product Overview Preface, Contents User Information SIMATIC FM 356 Application Function Module, Installation and Startup Manual Product Overview 1 Designing the Mechanical Configuration 2 Addressing the M7-300 Modules

More information

Digital output module. DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7522-1BH10-0AA0) SIMATIC

Digital output module. DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7522-1BH10-0AA0) SIMATIC Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7522-1BH10-0AA0) SIMATIC S7-1500/ET 200MP Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7522-1BH10-0AA0) Manual Preface Documentation guide 1 Product overview

More information

SIMADYN D Digital Control System. Fiber-Optic Rack Coupling CS12. User Manual. Edition DK No

SIMADYN D Digital Control System. Fiber-Optic Rack Coupling CS12. User Manual. Edition DK No SIMADYN D Digital Control System User Manual Fiber-Optic Rack Coupling CS12 Edition 05.95 DK No. 237741 User Manual, Fiber-Optic Rack Coupling CS12 Edition Status 1 Fiber-Optic Rack Coupling CS12 05.95

More information

DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) Manual Preface Properties 1 Parameters 2 Diagnostics 3 04/2007 A5E01077141-01

More information

Power module PM-E DC24V/8A RO SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24V/8A RO (6ES7138-4CA80-0AB0) Preface. Properties.

Power module PM-E DC24V/8A RO SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24V/8A RO (6ES7138-4CA80-0AB0) Preface. Properties. Power module PM-E DC24V/8A RO (6ES7138-4CA80-0AB0) SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24V/8A RO (6ES7138-4CA80-0AB0) Preface Properties 1 Parameters 2 Diagnostics 3 Configuring 4 Manual

More information

DI 8x24VDC ST digital input module SIMATIC. ET 200SP DI 8x24VDC ST digital input module (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0) Preface. Documentation guide

DI 8x24VDC ST digital input module SIMATIC. ET 200SP DI 8x24VDC ST digital input module (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0) Preface. Documentation guide DI 8x24VDC ST digital input module (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0) SIMATIC ET 200SP DI 8x24VDC ST digital input module (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0) Manual Preface Documentation guide 1 Product overview 2 Connecting 3 Parameter

More information

Operating Instructions (Compact) SIMATIC. Industrial PC SIMATIC Microbox PC 420. Siemens. Release 11/2006 A5E

Operating Instructions (Compact) SIMATIC. Industrial PC SIMATIC Microbox PC 420. Siemens. Release 11/2006 A5E Operating Instructions (Compact) 1 SIMATIC Industrial PC Release 11/2006 A5E00344128-04 Siemens Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety,

More information

IV-30 Operating Manual for Pulse Distributor Cassette with potential separation

IV-30 Operating Manual for Pulse Distributor Cassette with potential separation IV-30 Operating Manual for Pulse Distributor Cassette with potential separation Edition-/Rev.-Date: 09/08/2006 Document-/Rev.-No.: TR - EAK - BA - GB - 0093-02 Software version: - File name: TR-EAK-BA-GB-0093-02.DOC

More information

JUMO ecotrans ph 03 Microprocessor transmitter/ switching device for ph/redox voltage and temperature

JUMO ecotrans ph 03 Microprocessor transmitter/ switching device for ph/redox voltage and temperature Page 1/7 JUMO ecotrans 03 Microprocessor transmitter/ switching device for /Redox voltage and temperature with a 2-line LCD for mounting on a 35 mm DIN rail Brief description Depending on the configuration,

More information

ET 200S distributed I/O system 4DO DC24V/2A ST digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD32-0AA0)

ET 200S distributed I/O system 4DO DC24V/2A ST digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD32-0AA0) 4DO DC24V/2A ST digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD32- SIMATIC Preface 1 Properties 2 Diagnostics 3 ET 200S distributed I/O system 4DO DC24V/2A ST digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD32- Manual 10/2015

More information

SIMATIC. ET 200SP DQ 4x VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Preface. Guide to documentation. Product overview.

SIMATIC. ET 200SP DQ 4x VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Preface. Guide to documentation. Product overview. Preface Guide to documentation 1 SIMATIC ET 200SP DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) Manual Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameter assignment/addressing 4 Interrupts/diagnostics

More information

SINAMICS G130. Voltage Sensing Module 10 (VSM10) Operating instructions 03/2011 SINAMICS

SINAMICS G130. Voltage Sensing Module 10 (VSM10) Operating instructions 03/2011 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Operating instructions 03/2011 SINAMICS s Safety information 1 General 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Voltage Sensing Module 10 (VSM10) Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Technical

More information

SIMATIC/SINAMICS. Getting started with SINAMICS V90 PN on S Motion Control. Fundamental safety instructions 1. Introduction

SIMATIC/SINAMICS. Getting started with SINAMICS V90 PN on S Motion Control. Fundamental safety instructions 1. Introduction Fundamental safety instructions 1 Introduction 2 SIMATIC/SINAMICS Getting started with SINAMICS V90 PN on S7-1500 Motion Control Getting Started Prepare the configuration 3 Create a project 4 Creating

More information

SIPART Software. 9/2 Serial interface/hardware. 9/3 Communication driver for S7/ PCS 7. 9/4 SIPART device driver WinCC

SIPART Software. 9/2 Serial interface/hardware. 9/3 Communication driver for S7/ PCS 7. 9/4 SIPART device driver WinCC SIPART Software Siemens AG 2007 /2 Serial interface/hardware /3 Communication driver for S7/ PCS 7 /4 SIPART device driver WinCC /5 Graphic configuration using SIPROM DR24 Notes: Parameterization and configuration

More information

Monitoring technique. VARIMETER Voltage relay MK 9064N, MH 9064

Monitoring technique. VARIMETER Voltage relay MK 9064N, MH 9064 Monitoring technique VARIMETER Voltage relay MK 9064N, MH 9064 0269462 Your Advantages Preventive maintenance For better productivity Quicker fault locating Precise and reliable Min-, Max. value or window

More information

A B

A B ET 200U Distributed I/O Station Manual System Overview Technical Description Mechanical and Electrical Configuration ET 200U(DP Siemens): Address Assignment, Starting Up, Diagnosing Faults ET 200U(DP Standard):

More information

Power module PM-E DC24V HF SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24V HF (6ES7138-4CA60-0AB0) Preface. Properties.

Power module PM-E DC24V HF SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24V HF (6ES7138-4CA60-0AB0) Preface. Properties. Power module PM-E DC24V HF (6ES7138-4CA60-0AB0) SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24V HF (6ES7138-4CA60-0AB0) Preface Properties 1 Parameters 2 Diagnostics 3 Configuring 4 Manual 06/2010

More information

Industrial Controls. Motor management and control devices SIMOCODE pro - Application examples. Introduction 1. Application example

Industrial Controls. Motor management and control devices SIMOCODE pro - Application examples. Introduction 1. Application example Introduction 1 Application example 2 Industrial Controls Motor management and control devices SIMOCODE pro - Application examples Application Manual Example circuits control functions 3 Further application

More information

Siemens Industrial s

Siemens Industrial s SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions 05/2010 SINAMICS Siemens Industrial s Sinusoidal filter Safety information 1 General 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Technical

More information

SIWAREX JB Aluminum Housing. Instruction Manual Edition 03/2006

SIWAREX JB Aluminum Housing. Instruction Manual Edition 03/2006 s SIWAREX JB Aluminum Housing Instruction Manual Edition 03/2006 Table of Contents Table of Contents... 2 Warning and Safety Terms... 3 General... 4 1 Technical Description... 5 1.1 Area of Application...

More information

SX90 Process Controller

SX90 Process Controller Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. In the interests of development and improvement of the product, we reserve the right to change the specification without

More information

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24..48V/AC V (6ES7138-4CB11-0AB0) Preface. Properties 1. Parameters 2.

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24..48V/AC V (6ES7138-4CB11-0AB0) Preface. Properties 1. Parameters 2. SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24..48V/AC24..230V (6ES7138-4CB11-0AB0) Manual Preface Properties 1 Parameters 2 Diagnostics 3 Configuring 4 04/2007

More information

Line reactors SINAMICS. SINAMICS G120P Line reactors. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation 3. Electrical installation 4

Line reactors SINAMICS. SINAMICS G120P Line reactors. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation 3. Electrical installation 4 Safety information 1 General 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G120P Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Technical specifications 5 Operating Instructions Control version V4.6 11/2013 A5E32845290B AA

More information

DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Preface SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 2RO NO/NC DC24..48V/5A AC24..230V/5A (6ES7132-4HB50-0AB0) SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O Digital electronic module 2RO NO/NC DC24..48V/5A

More information

English. Operating manual. Universal transmitter UT125. Save for later reference. Companies / brands of GHM

English. Operating manual. Universal transmitter UT125.  Save for later reference. Companies / brands of GHM English Operating manual Universal transmitter UT125 Companies / brands of GHM www.ghm-messtechnik.de Save for later reference. Table of contents page 1. Intended use (areas of application)... 3 1.1 Safety

More information

SIMATIC. Communications processor CP 340 first commissioning steps. Getting Started 04/2005 A5E

SIMATIC. Communications processor CP 340 first commissioning steps. Getting Started 04/2005 A5E SIMATIC Communications processor Getting Started 04/2005 A5E00442606-01 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent

More information

SIMATIC PC. Panel PC 577 Installation Using the Docu & Drivers CD 10/2005. Preface, Table of Contents. Introduction 1.

SIMATIC PC. Panel PC 577 Installation Using the Docu & Drivers CD 10/2005. Preface, Table of Contents. Introduction 1. Preface, Table of Contents SIMATIC PC Panel PC 577 Installation Using the Docu & Drivers CD 10/2005 Installation Guide Introduction 1 Documentation 2 Installing Drivers 3 Other Software 4 Browsing Through

More information

DS 96/48 PK. Digital indicator. Manual 42/33-90 EN Rev. 00 DIM

DS 96/48 PK. Digital indicator. Manual 42/33-90 EN Rev. 00 DIM DS 96/48 PK Digital indicator Manual 42/33-90 EN Rev. 00 A1 A2 DIM E DS 96/48 PK Digital Indicator Manual Document No. 42/33-90 EN Edition 06.01 Revision 00 Manufacturer: ABB Automation Products GmbH Höseler

More information

Power supply module PS 25W 24VDC (6ES7505-0KA00-0AB0) SIMATIC. S7-1500/ET 200MP Power supply module PS 25W 24VDC (6ES7505-0KA00-0AB0) Preface

Power supply module PS 25W 24VDC (6ES7505-0KA00-0AB0) SIMATIC. S7-1500/ET 200MP Power supply module PS 25W 24VDC (6ES7505-0KA00-0AB0) Preface Power supply module PS 25W 24VDC (6ES7505-0KA00-0AB0) SIMATIC S7-1500/ET 200MP Power supply module PS 25W 24VDC (6ES7505-0KA00-0AB0) Manual Preface Documentation guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters

More information

SINAMICS. SINAMICS G120P dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation. Electrical installation 4

SINAMICS. SINAMICS G120P dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation. Electrical installation 4 Safety information 1 General 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G120P dv/dt filter plus Voltage Peak Limiter Operating Instructions Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Maintenance and servicing 5 Technical

More information

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24..48V (6ES7138-4CA50-0AB0) Preface. Properties 1. Parameters 2. Diagnostics 3.

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24..48V (6ES7138-4CA50-0AB0) Preface. Properties 1. Parameters 2. Diagnostics 3. SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O Power module PM-E DC24..48V (6ES7138-4CA50-0AB0) Preface Properties 1 Parameters 2 Diagnostics 3 Configuring 4 Manual 04/2007 A5E01119980-01

More information

Product and Applications Description. Note. Example of Operation. Installation Instructions. Application Programs WARNING

Product and Applications Description. Note. Example of Operation. Installation Instructions. Application Programs WARNING Product and Applications Description Note If the application program is not loaded completely by the ETS, you had better interrupt the 24 V voltage supply of the I/O-module during the loading interval.

More information

NMID. Remote control. SAPIM I/O number. SAPIM I/O number NBRN (RS485) ZM100. Relay, 24 VDC - + UO07 UI11 UI10 UI09 UI08 UI07 UI06 UI05 UI04 UI03 UI02

NMID. Remote control. SAPIM I/O number. SAPIM I/O number NBRN (RS485) ZM100. Relay, 24 VDC - + UO07 UI11 UI10 UI09 UI08 UI07 UI06 UI05 UI04 UI03 UI02 1/8 NRK16/A, NRK16-B/A, (NRK16-T /A, NRK14-T /A, NRK16-WEB/A) Control and interlock devices with pre-programmed system-specific application modules The controllers may be used as stand-alone control and

More information

Description. Monitoring functions Evaluation of brush length monitoring, digital, non-floating A00

Description. Monitoring functions Evaluation of brush length monitoring, digital, non-floating A00 Monitoring functions Evaluation of brush length monitoring, digital, non-floating Evaluation of brush length monitoring, digital, floating A00 A06 Non-floating brush length monitoring with use of KM01

More information

Isolated Wideband Voltage Input 3B40 / 3B41 FEATURES APPLICATIONS PRODUCT OVERVIEW FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

Isolated Wideband Voltage Input 3B40 / 3B41 FEATURES APPLICATIONS PRODUCT OVERVIEW FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM Isolated Wideband Voltage Input 3B40 / 3B41 FEATURES Interfaces, amplifies, protects& filters wide-bandwidth (h0 khz) single-channel analog voltage inputs. Module provides simultaneous precision voltage

More information

RSTI-EP Slice I/O. Analog Input Modules `EP-3164, EP-3264, EP-3124, EP-3368, EP-3468 EP-3664, EP-3704, EP GFK-2960F September 2018

RSTI-EP Slice I/O. Analog Input Modules `EP-3164, EP-3264, EP-3124, EP-3368, EP-3468 EP-3664, EP-3704, EP GFK-2960F September 2018 September 2018 Module Status LED Channel Status LEDs Digital Input Connector Ground 24 V DC FE Analog Input Module RSTI-EP Slice I/O Analog Input Modules `EP-3164, EP-3264, EP-3124, EP-3368, EP-3468 EP-3664,

More information

SIMATIC. Distributed I/O Device ET 200iSP. Preface, Contents. Product Overview Getting Started with Commissioning. Configuration Options.

SIMATIC. Distributed I/O Device ET 200iSP. Preface, Contents. Product Overview Getting Started with Commissioning. Configuration Options. SIMATIC Distributed I/O Device ET 200iSP Manual This documentation is available under order number 6ES7152-1AA00-8BA0 Preface, Contents Product Overview Getting Started with Commissioning Configuration

More information

ILBPB24DO32. Inline Block IO Module for PROFIBUS With 32 Digital Outputs. AUTOMATIONWORX Data Sheet 6889_en_04. Description

ILBPB24DO32. Inline Block IO Module for PROFIBUS With 32 Digital Outputs. AUTOMATIONWORX Data Sheet 6889_en_04. Description Inline Block IO Module for PROFIBUS With 32 Digital Outputs AUTOMATIONWORX Data Sheet 6889_en_04 Description PHOENIX CONTACT - 03/2007 & & ' ) The ILB PB 24 DO32 module is designed for use within a PROFIBUS

More information

General Information 1. Connection 2. User Interface 3 ATC5300. Menus 4. Automatic Transfer Controller. Remote Control Software Manual A5E

General Information 1. Connection 2. User Interface 3 ATC5300. Menus 4. Automatic Transfer Controller. Remote Control Software Manual A5E s General Information 1 Connection 2 Automatic Transfer Controller User Interface 3 Menus 4 Remote Control Software Manual Edition 01/2010 A5E02469028-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual

More information

Converter SINAMICS G150. Type 6SL37102G

Converter SINAMICS G150. Type 6SL37102G Tests carried out on drives This documentation pertains to LV Umrichter E11 F72 F76 F79 L45 L50 L57 L68 M54 U11 Reference Manual Converter SINAMICS G150 Type 6SL37102G Edition 02/2019 www.siemens.com/drives

More information

Data Sheet T 6493 EN. TROVIS 6400 Automation System TROVIS 6493 Compact Controller. For panel mounting (front frame 48 x 96 mm/1.89 x 3.

Data Sheet T 6493 EN. TROVIS 6400 Automation System TROVIS 6493 Compact Controller. For panel mounting (front frame 48 x 96 mm/1.89 x 3. Data Sheet T 6493 EN TROVIS 6400 Automation System TROVIS 6493 Compact Controller For panel mounting (front frame 48 x 96 mm/1.89 x 3.78 inch) Application Digital controller to automate industrial and

More information

SIMATIC. ET 200S IM CPU Interface Module. Introduction. New features 2. Technical specifications 3. Product Information 06/2007 A5E

SIMATIC. ET 200S IM CPU Interface Module. Introduction. New features 2. Technical specifications 3. Product Information 06/2007 A5E SIMATIC ET 200S SIMATIC Introduction 1 New features 2 Technical specifications 3 ET 200S Product Information 06/2007 A5E01159154-01 Safety Guidelines Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you

More information

output devices. connected to the controller. data communications link. relay systems. user program. MECH1500Quiz1ReviewVersion2 Name: Class: Date:

output devices. connected to the controller. data communications link. relay systems. user program. MECH1500Quiz1ReviewVersion2 Name: Class: Date: Class: Date: MECH1500Quiz1ReviewVersion2 True/False Indicate whether the statement is true or false. 1. The number and type of I/Os cannot be changed in a fixed PLC. 2. In a PLC system, there is a physical

More information

Isolated Voltage Input 3B30 / 3B31 FEATURES APPLICATIONS PRODUCT OVERVIEW FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

Isolated Voltage Input 3B30 / 3B31 FEATURES APPLICATIONS PRODUCT OVERVIEW FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM Isolated Voltage Input 3B30 / 3B31 FEATURES Interfaces, amplifies, & filtersanalog input voltages. Narrow-bandwidth (3Hz) single-channel single conditioning. Module provides simultaneous precision voltage

More information

dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter SINAMICS SINAMICS G120P dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter Safety information 1 General 2

dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter SINAMICS SINAMICS G120P dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter Safety information 1 General 2 dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter SINAMICS SINAMICS G120P dv/dt filter compact plus Voltage Peak Limiter Operating Instructions Safety information 1 General 2 Mechanical installation 3 Electrical

More information

ST (6ES7522-1BH00-0AB0)

ST (6ES7522-1BH00-0AB0) SIMATIC S7-1500 Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7522-1BH00-0AB0) Manual Edition 07/2014 Answers for industry. DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST Digital Output Module (6ES7522-1BH00-0AB0) SIMATIC S7-1500/ET

More information

PROFIsafe SITRANS. Pressure transmitter SITRANS P, DS III PROFIsafe series. Product Information 7MF4*34 04/2008 A5E

PROFIsafe SITRANS. Pressure transmitter SITRANS P, DS III PROFIsafe series. Product Information 7MF4*34 04/2008 A5E 1 SITRANS Pressure transmitter SITRANS P, DS III PROFIsafe series Product Information 7MF4*34 04/2008 A5E00732533-02 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure

More information

ABB Drives. User s Manual. Modbus Adapter Module RMBA-01

ABB Drives. User s Manual. Modbus Adapter Module RMBA-01 ABB Drives User s Manual Modbus Adapter Module RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter Module RMBA-01 User s Manual 3AFE 64498851 REV A EN EFFECTIVE: 1.3.2002 2002 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved. Safety instructions Overview

More information

ABB Drives. User s Manual Modbus Adapter Module FMBA-01

ABB Drives. User s Manual Modbus Adapter Module FMBA-01 ABB Drives User s Manual Modbus Adapter Module FMBA-01 Modbus Adapter Module FMBA-01 User s Manual 3AFE68586704 REV A EN EFFECTIVE: 27.06.2005 2005 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved. 5 Safety instructions

More information

Cycle and response times SIMATIC. S Cycle and response times. Preface. Documentation guide. Program processing 2. Cyclic program processing 3

Cycle and response times SIMATIC. S Cycle and response times. Preface. Documentation guide. Program processing 2. Cyclic program processing 3 Preface Documentation guide 1 SIMATIC S7-1500 Program processing 2 Cyclic program processing 3 Event-driven program processing 4 Function Manual 02/2014 A5E03461504-02 Legal information Warning notice

More information

Industrial Controls Siemens Drives & PLCs

Industrial Controls Siemens Drives & PLCs ECOFAST System and PROFIBUS DP Manual 10/2010 Industrial Controls Siemens Drives & PLCs Answers for industry. Introduction 1 Description 2 Industrial Controls ECOFAST System and PROFIBUS DP Manual Use

More information

CPX-Terminal. Brief description. CPX analogue I/O modules CPX-4AE CPX-2AA. English e [ ]

CPX-Terminal. Brief description. CPX analogue I/O modules CPX-4AE CPX-2AA. English e [ ] CPX-Terminal Brief description CPX analogue I/O modules CPX-2AE CPX-4AE CPX-2AA English 8080173 2017-11e [8080175] Translation of the original instructions Documentation on the product For all available

More information

RSTI-EP Slice I/O. Analog Input Modules `EP-3164, EP-3264, EP-3124, EP-3368, EP-3468 EP-3704, EP GFK-2960B November 2017

RSTI-EP Slice I/O. Analog Input Modules `EP-3164, EP-3264, EP-3124, EP-3368, EP-3468 EP-3704, EP GFK-2960B November 2017 November 2017 Module Status LED Channel Status LEDs Digital Input Connector Ground 24 V DC FE Analog Input Module RSTI-EP Slice I/O Analog Input Modules `EP-3164, EP-3264, EP-3124, EP-3368, EP-3468 EP-3704,

More information

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O. 4 IQ-SENSE module (6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0) Preface. 4 IQ-SENSE module (6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0) Parameters 2.

SIMATIC. ET 200S distributed I/O. 4 IQ-SENSE module (6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0) Preface. 4 IQ-SENSE module (6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0) Parameters 2. SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O 4 IQ-SENSE module (6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0) Manual Preface 4 IQ-SENSE module (6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0) 1 Parameters 2 Diagnostics 3 Control interface

More information

Device manual Field modules DP AC2630 / AC2631 / AC2634 AC2636 / AC2637 / AC / / 2013

Device manual Field modules DP AC2630 / AC2631 / AC2634 AC2636 / AC2637 / AC / / 2013 Device manual Field modules DP AC2630 / AC2631 / AC2634 AC2636 / AC2637 / AC2638 7390983 / 00 03 / 2013 Contents 1 Preliminary note................................................. 4 2 Safety instructions...............................................

More information

Use with 0 to 70 C ambient. temperature SIMATIC. Process Control System PCS 7 Use with 0 to 70 C ambient temperature. Preface 1. Product combination 2

Use with 0 to 70 C ambient. temperature SIMATIC. Process Control System PCS 7 Use with 0 to 70 C ambient temperature. Preface 1. Product combination 2 Use with 0 to 70 C ambient temperature SIMATIC Preface 1 Product combination 2 Product family 3 Process Control System PCS 7 Use with 0 to 70 C ambient temperature System Manual 02/2015 A5E35458345-AA

More information

Line reactors SINAMICS. SINAMICS G130 Line reactors. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation 3. Electrical installation

Line reactors SINAMICS. SINAMICS G130 Line reactors. Safety information 1. General. Mechanical installation 3. Electrical installation Safety information 1 General 2 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130 Mechanical installation 3 Electrical installation 4 Technical specifications 5 Operating Instructions Control version V4.7 04/2014 A5E00331462A Legal

More information

SIPART DR21 Controllers

SIPART DR21 Controllers Siemens AG 2010 SIPART DR21 Controllers /2 /2 Application, design /3 Mode of operation /8 Control and display functions /10 Function diagram /11 Configuring switches, on-line/off-line parameters /12 Technical

More information

Product and functional description

Product and functional description Product and functional description The RS 520/23 shutter / blind actuator is a KNX device with one relay output. The device is installed in an AP 118 Control Module Box or an AP 641 Room Control Box. The

More information

SIMATIC S Getting Started for First Time Users. Order No.: 6ZB5310-0NC02-0BA0 04/2007 A5E

SIMATIC S Getting Started for First Time Users. Order No.: 6ZB5310-0NC02-0BA0 04/2007 A5E SIMATIC S7-300 Getting Started for First Time Users Order No.: 6ZB5310-0NC02-0BA0 04/2007 A5E01094750-01 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal

More information

Installation and Setup

Installation and Setup Installation and Setup 1 In This Chapter Installing the H PBC The Profibus Network Configuring the Controller Installing the H PBC Setting the Node Address Setting the Node Address Profibus DP is usually

More information

Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) SIMATIC. ET 200SP Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Preface

Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) SIMATIC. ET 200SP Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Preface Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) SIMATIC ET 200SP Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) Manual Preface Documentation guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring up 3 Parameters/address

More information

English. Operating Manual. Conductive point level switch MLR120. Retain for later reference. Companies / brands of GHM

English. Operating Manual. Conductive point level switch MLR120.  Retain for later reference. Companies / brands of GHM English Operating Manual Conductive point level switch MLR120 Companies / brands of GHM www.ghm-group.de Retain for later reference Table of contents Page 1. Proper use (application areas)... 3 Safety

More information

Getting Started - Startdrive. Startdrive SINAMICS. Introduction 1. Connecting the drive unit to the PC. Creating a project 3

Getting Started - Startdrive. Startdrive SINAMICS. Introduction 1. Connecting the drive unit to the PC. Creating a project 3 Getting Started - Startdrive Introduction 1 Connecting the drive unit to the PC 2 Startdrive SINAMICS Getting Started Creating a project 3 Going online and incorporating devices 4 Commissioning the drive

More information

Aotewell SIMATIC S7-PDIAG for S7-300 and S Configuring Process Diagnostic Getting St

Aotewell   SIMATIC S7-PDIAG for S7-300 and S Configuring Process Diagnostic Getting St SIMATIC S7-PDIAG for S7-300 and S7-400 - Configuring Process Diagnostic Getting Started Edition 01/2003 First Steps with S7-PDIAG and ProAgent The Getting Started for This product is not a stand-alonedescription.

More information

5504 Thermocouple Analog Input Module

5504 Thermocouple Analog Input Module 550 Thermocouple Analog Input Installation, Operation and Maintenance Setup Manual 5/9/0 Safety Information The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical

More information

MINI MCR-SL-UI-REL(-SP)

MINI MCR-SL-UI-REL(-SP) Configurable Threshold Value Switch Data Sheet 11/2004 Method of Operation The configurable 3-way threshold value switch MINI MCR-SL-UI-REL(-SP) is used to control and monitor analog standard signals.

More information

Digital output module. DQ 16x230VAC/2A ST Relay (6ES7522-5HH00-0AB0) SIMATIC

Digital output module. DQ 16x230VAC/2A ST Relay (6ES7522-5HH00-0AB0) SIMATIC Digital output module DQ 16x230VAC/2A ST Relay (6ES7522-5HH00-0AB0) SIMATIC S7-1500/ET 200MP Digital output module DQ 16x230VAC/2A ST Relay (6ES7522-5HH00-0AB0) Manual Preface Documentation guide 1 Product

More information

SIMATIC. Communications processor CP First Steps in Commissioning. Getting Started 09/2008 A5E

SIMATIC. Communications processor CP First Steps in Commissioning. Getting Started 09/2008 A5E SIMATIC Communications processor Getting Started 09/2008 A5E02291899-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety,

More information

Serial PROFIBUS Interface

Serial PROFIBUS Interface Installation Manual Serial PROFIBUS Interface Version: EN-062016-2.3 Copyright 2016 Softing Industrial Automation GmbH Disclaimer of liability The information contained in these instructions corresponds

More information

Safety Barriers. CEAG safety barriers can be used for all kinds of instrumentation applications.

Safety Barriers. CEAG safety barriers can be used for all kinds of instrumentation applications. Safety Barriers Description Safety barriers limit the energy fed to an intrinsically safe circuit so that neither sparks nor thermal effects (hot surfaces) can cause an explosion. CEAG safety barriers

More information

VariTrans P Standard-Signal Isolators

VariTrans P Standard-Signal Isolators VariTrans Standard-Signal Isolators Warranty Defects occurring within 5 years from delivery date shall be remedied free of charge at our works (carriage and insurance paid by sender). The professional

More information

GRASSO SYSTEM CONTROL

GRASSO SYSTEM CONTROL Control device for Packages and Chillers with screw compressors Product information 09.2002/ 2 638630_pi gsc gbr.doc Copyright GmbH Refrigeration Technology The contents of this documentation and the enclosed

More information

MU110-6U. Analog output module 6 channel. User guide

MU110-6U. Analog output module 6 channel. User guide MU110-6U Analog output module 6 channel User guide MU110-6U_2016.12_0221_EN All rights reserved Subject to technical changes and misprints akytec GmbH Vahrenwalder Str. 269 A 30179 Hannover Тел.: +49 (0)

More information

IO-Link Master (6ES7147-4JD00-0AB0) SIMATIC. ET 200pro IO-Link Master (6ES7147-4JD00-0AB0) Preface. Documentation guide. Product overview.

IO-Link Master (6ES7147-4JD00-0AB0) SIMATIC. ET 200pro IO-Link Master (6ES7147-4JD00-0AB0) Preface. Documentation guide. Product overview. IO-Link Master (6ES7147-4JD00-0AB0) SIMATIC ET 200pro IO-Link Master (6ES7147-4JD00-0AB0) Manual Preface Documentation guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters/address space 4 Diagnostics alarms

More information

CM PtP RS422/485 BA communication. module (6ES7540 1AB00 0AA0) SIMATIC. S7-1500/ET 200MP CM PtP RS422/485 BA communication module (6ES7540 1AB00 0AA0)

CM PtP RS422/485 BA communication. module (6ES7540 1AB00 0AA0) SIMATIC. S7-1500/ET 200MP CM PtP RS422/485 BA communication module (6ES7540 1AB00 0AA0) CM PtP RS422/485 BA communication module (6ES7540 1AB00 0AA0) SIMATIC S7-1500/ET 200MP CM PtP RS422/485 BA communication module (6ES7540 1AB00 0AA0) Manual Preface Documentation guide 1 Product overview

More information

Safety Instructions 1-1 Avoid unintended Start General Description 2-2

Safety Instructions 1-1 Avoid unintended Start General Description 2-2 Contents Contents 1 Safety and precautions 1-1 Safety Instructions 1-1 Avoid unintended Start. 1-1 2 Introduction 2-1 General Description 2-2 3 Supported Configuration 3-1 Introduction 3-1 Fixed-speed

More information

Preface 1. Storage System 2. Contact Information 3 SIPLUS CMS. SIPLUS CMS X-Tools - User Manual Storage System. English.

Preface 1. Storage System 2. Contact Information 3 SIPLUS CMS. SIPLUS CMS X-Tools - User Manual Storage System. English. X-Tools - User Manual - 07 - Storage System Preface 1 Storage System 2 Contact Information 3 X-Tools User Manual - 07 - Storage System Release 2012-09 Release 2012-09 1 / 44 X-Tools - User Manual - 07

More information

SIMATIC HMI. Software RemoteOperate V2. Preface. Overview 1. Range of functions of the RemoteOperate software. Hardware and software requirements

SIMATIC HMI. Software RemoteOperate V2. Preface. Overview 1. Range of functions of the RemoteOperate software. Hardware and software requirements Preface SIMATIC HMI Software SIMATIC HMI Software Programming Manual Overview 1 Range of functions of the RemoteOperate software 2 Hardware and software requirements 3 Installing RemoteOperate 4 Server

More information

SIPROM DR24. Manual. Graphical Configuration of the multifunction unit SIPART DR24. Introduction 1. Functions of SIPROM DR24. Graphical Layout 3

SIPROM DR24. Manual. Graphical Configuration of the multifunction unit SIPART DR24. Introduction 1. Functions of SIPROM DR24. Graphical Layout 3 Introduction 1 Functions of 2 Graphical Layout 3 Tabular Layout 4 Graphical Configuration of the multifunction unit SIPART DR24 Manual Edit parameters 5 Documentation 6 Short-cut keys 7 Error messages

More information

SIMATIC Easy Motion Control. Getting Started Edition 02/2003. First Steps in Commissioning

SIMATIC Easy Motion Control. Getting Started Edition 02/2003. First Steps in Commissioning SIMATIC Edition 02/2003 First Steps in Commissioning Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and connected equipment against

More information

MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)

MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC) Configurable Temperature Transducer for PT100 Data Sheet 04/2005 Functions MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC) is a configurable 3-way isolated temperature measuring transducer. It is suitable for the connection

More information

Compact Universal Controllers

Compact Universal Controllers 7 865 ISO9001 RWF40... complete with housing Compact Universal Controllers RWF40... The RWF40... is a universal digital boiler temperature / pressure controller with functions designed specifically for

More information

Manual Edition 03/2010

Manual Edition 03/2010 Manual Edition 03/2010 Communication with LOGO! on the EIB according to the Konnex standard Preface Description 1 LOGO! Manual Application planning 2 Installation 3 Connecting 4 Commissioning 5 Service

More information

RMx621. Appendix to the operating manual

RMx621. Appendix to the operating manual Appendix to the operating manual RMx621 DP-slave module ( PROFIBUS-coupler ) from V2.01.00 Connecting the RMx621 to PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 serial interface using the external module (HMS AnyBus Communicator

More information